diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21810-h')
23 files changed, 10090 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21810-h/21810-h.htm b/21810-h/21810-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..12823f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/21810-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,10090 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + + @media print { + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit; + text-align: right; color: gray; display: none; visibility: hidden; } + } + @media screen { + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit; + text-align: right; color: gray; display: inline; visibility: visible;} + .pagenum a {text-decoration:none; color:#444;} + .pagenum a:hover {color:#F00;} + } + + div.frontmatter {max-width: 40em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + page-break-before: always; } + + body > p { text-align: justify; text-indent: .5em; + max-width: 40em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + p {margin-top: .33em; font-size: medium; margin-bottom: 0em;} + p.noindent {text-indent: 0em;} + p.center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} + p.titleblock {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; line-height: 125%;} + p.titleblockl {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: left; line-height: 125%;} + p.chapter {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; line-height: 100%;} + + h2+p, h3+p { text-indent: 0; } + + h1,h2,h3,h4 { + text-align: center; + clear: both; /* font-weight: normal; */ page-break-after: avoid ! important;} + hr {width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; + clear: both;} + hr.chapter {width: 55%; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 0em; page-break-before: always;} + hr.sorta {width: 45%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;} + hr.minor {width: 30%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;} + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + td.chap {text-align: left; padding-left: 10px;} + td.pr {text-align: right; padding-left: 6px; } + td.abstract p {letter-spacing: 0.02em; text-align: justify; + margin-left: 14%; margin-right: 0%; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: 0.75em;} + + body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + + a {text-decoration: none;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + .figleft {margin: auto; float: left; text-align: left;} + .caption {font-size: 80%; font-weight: bold;} + .scribedcaption {font-size: 100%; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;} + img {border: none;} + + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 75%;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the +Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island</p> +<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p> +<p>Release Date: June 11, 2007 [eBook #21810]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF THE ISLAND***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 659px;"> +<img src="images/cover-spine.jpg" width="659" height="710" alt="Cover" title="Cover" /> +</div> +<hr class="major" /> + +<p class="center"> +<span style="font-size: 150%;">THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</span><br /><br /> +<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">By</span> ROGER T. FINLAY</span> +</p> + +<p class="noindent" style="margin-bottom:2em;">A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating +the remarkable experiences of two boys and a man, +who are cast upon an island in the South Seas with +absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the +exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning +clothing, tools and weapons and not only do they train +nature's forces to work for them but they subdue and +finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The books +contain two thousand items of interest that every boy +ought to know.</p> + + +<p class="center"> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Castaways<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Exploring the Island<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Mysteries of the Caverns<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Tribesmen<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Capture and Pursuit<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Conquest of the Savages<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Adventures on Strange Islands<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Treasures of the Islands<br /> +<br /><br /> + <i>Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.</i><br /> + <i>60 cents per vol., postpaid.</i><br /> +<br /> +<span style="font-size: 70%;">PUBLISHED BY</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: 115%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue New York</span></span> +</p> +<hr class="major" /> +<h2>TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</h2> +<hr class="major" /> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 373px; margin-bottom: 5em;"> +<a name="illus-003" id="illus-003"></a> +<img src="images/illus-003.png" width="373" height="569" alt="The scout from the rear now came in with a leap" title="The scout from the rear now came in with a leap" /> +<span class="caption">"<i>The scout from the rear now came in with a leap</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_27">See p. 27</a>]</p> +</div> + + + +<table width="450" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page" border="1"> + <col style="width:80%;" /> + <tr> + <td align="center"> +<br /><br /> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 180%; margin-bottom: .5em; font-variant: small-caps; word-spacing: 0.4em;">The Wonder Island Boys</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 145%; margin-bottom: 1em;">TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 0em;">BY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0em; font-size: 110%;">ROGER T. FINLAY</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 3em;">ILLUSTRATED</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 119px;"> +<img src="images/illus-nybc.png" width="119" height="116" alt="N Y B Co." title="" /> +<span class="caption">N Y B Co.</span> +</div> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 5em; font-size: 85%; margin-bottom: 0em;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0px; font-size: 85%; font-variant: small-caps; margin-bottom: 2em;">New York</p> + </td> + </tr> +</table> + + +<p class="center"> +<span class="smcap" style="font-size: 110%;">Copyright, 1915, by</span> +<br /><span style="font-size: 110%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span> +</p> + + +<hr class="sorta" /> +<h3>CONTENTS</h3> +<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<col style="width:5%;" /> +<col style="width:80%;" /> +<col style="width:15%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left" style="font-size: small">CHAPTER</td> + <td colspan="2" class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">I.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><span class="smcap">The Peculiar Signals</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_15">Page 15</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The doleful sound. The Alma Perdita. "Cry of the Lost +Soul." John, Uraso and Muro listening to the signals of +the enemies. The night watch. Stalking. The answering +cry. The Konotos. Sacrificial feasts. The dark of the +moon. Its significance. The language of birds and +animals. Their meaning. Discovery of cannibals. The +telltale bone. Evidence of more than one tribe. Strange +customs. Sacrifices of ancient times. Mexican rites. +Superstitions. Previous history of the boys. Varney, +Uraso and Muro. The Professor. The wreck and adventures. +John's search for records, and inscriptions. Mysterious +happenings. Waiting for morning. The plan outlined. The +days of the sacrifices. Determine to prevent the killing +of captives. Discovery of the natives in vicinity. +Investigating the hills.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">II.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><span class="smcap">The Savages on the Hill</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_26">Page 26</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>John's instructions. John and Muro scouting. The natives +intercepting Uraso. Preparing to resist the attack. +The signaling instrument. A shot. A hurried report +from the scout. Sending a messenger to Muro. The +puzzled natives. Muro attacked. Marching east. Muro +in danger. Making a demonstration. The weird drums. +The ambush. The approach of the natives. The attempt +to be friendly. The Chief's refusal. The appearance of +Uraso. Uraso's ruse. The savages confounded. Muro +surrounded. His escape. The savages retreating. +Muro's story. Muro's efforts to make friends of the +natives. Driving them from the woods. The sea of the +east. The runner to the landing. The peculiar drums. +The Marimba. The mountain deer.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">III.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><span class="smcap">Capture of the Village</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_38">Page 38</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The trying time at night. No selfishness in education. +The evening talks. Astronomy and early humanity. +Savage rites determined and carried out by the signs of +the stars. The Zodiac. Its origin. The universal superstitions. +A common origin. The continents. The theory +of a mid-Atlantean continent. The theory of the joined +continents. Language as a criterion of the unity of the +races. The pyramids. The tales of the Egyptian priests. +The deep sea soundings by the ship <i>Challenger</i>. The beating +of the weird drums in the night. Evidence of the natives' +belief in witch doctors. The plan of advance outlined +by John. The boys, accompanied by John and +portion of the force advancing. Nearing the village. +Hearing the shouting and the drums. Causes of the +demonstrations. A captive. At the edge of the village. +A curious proceeding. A huge Chief. The witch doctors. +Their fantastic garb. The Chief's defiance. Demands return +of the captured Chief. Asks John to surrender. +Commands the Korinos to destroy captive. They bring +forward Tarra, their own messenger. The warning. +The shot.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">IV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><span class="smcap">Rescuing a White Captive</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_53">Page 53</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Tarra freed. When captured. The fallen witch doctor. +The surprise. The warning from Uraso. Exorcising +the bad spirits. The influence of noise on savage +minds. The gun silencers. The savages insist on aiding +their fallen witch doctor. The shot with the silencer. +The awe produced. John the white Korino. The terror +among the natives. The Chief retreats. Entering the +village. The Chief and people flee. The reserves come +up. The sick and wounded in the village. A prison +stockade. Rescuing prisoners. Their terrible plight. +A white captive. The stockade burned. Learning about +the tribes on the island. The messenger to the Chief. +The latter's message. John's bold march to see the +Chief. Astounded at John's bravery. John's peace pact +with the Chief. The return to the village. The Chief +assured of the friendship of John and his people. +Learning about the other tribe. One sun to the north. +The Chief told why the white Chief was so powerful. +Wisdom. John's practical example to the Chief.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">V.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><span class="smcap">Return of the Natives</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_66">Page 66</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Trinkets. Adornments for the natives. Gifts. The day +appointed for the sacrifices. John and party invited by +the Chief. John sends for the gifts. The <i>Pioneer</i> at the +landing. Sails to the native village. The Korinos called +before the Chief. He demands that they produce the captives +for sacrifice. The Korinos learn of the destruction +of the stockade, and the release of the captives. The +Chief condemns the Korinos to take their places. John +secures delay. At the beach. The natives gathering +clams for the feast. The Korinos and their caves. A +sail. The boys spread the news. The signal. The natives +wonder at the sight of the vessel. The <i>Pioneer</i>. +The feast that night. Spitting meat. The natives' customs. +Vegetables. The drink. Arialad. The value of +the root. Ginseng.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">VI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><span class="smcap">The Savage Ceremonials</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_78">Page 78</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The day for the ceremonies. The native cloth weaving. +Dyeing. Black and red. The grotesque figures. The +spears. The colored streamers. The covered points. +The flag idea. A brilliant scheme by the boys. The +band for the ceremonies. A procession. The ship's band. +The leader. The enthusiasm in the village. The dancing +natives. Arranging the order of the procession. +The tall man and huge spear. The Korinos. The band +and the flag at the procession. The leader. The magnolia +trees. The march to the forest. The great tree +on the hill. The ceremony. Striking the tree. The +flower at the top. How it was brought down. The rite +of the flower. Incineration. The powder. The dance. +Return of the procession.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">VII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><span class="smcap">Significance of Native Rites</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_88">Page 88</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Fasting before the feast. Great success of the ceremony. +The significance of the flower rites. Ancient origin of +rites. Explaining customs which followed the practice +of scalping. Head hunters. The hair token. The +flower before the fruit. The Druids. The ceremonia of +the mistletoe. The antidote. The oak as a sacred tree. +The great feast after the ceremony. Table implements. +The Korinos. Where they were imprisoned. Prepared +for the sacrifice. Their attempted escape. Gluttony. +Habits of savages in this respect. The siesta. The boys +discover the escape of the Korinos. The Marmozets. +The tall native with the knotted club. His remarkable +garb. The Chief's crown. The club-bearer reports the +escape of the Korinos. The Chief's anger. Arrests the +guards. Condemns them to suffer instead of the Korinos. +The procession to the place of sacrifice. The sacrificial +altar.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">VIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><span class="smcap">Hypnotism on Savages</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_100">Page 100</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>John's suggestion to the Chief. Asks that he be made +the executioner. Uraso's address to the culprits. Their +terror. Mysticism. Hypnotic influences. Mesmerism. +Constant repetitions. Mystic numbers. The spell on all +the natives. The effect of the mesmeric influence on the +Chief. The rigid subjects. John the peerless Korino. +The threats against the witch doctors. Bringing the +victims to life. Amazement of the people. The Chief's +address to his people. The return to the village. +The feast. The mystic third. The dance at the end of +the festival. To settle the fate of the Korinos. The recovery +of the faculties of the white captive. His story. +The identity of the skeleton found on Venture Island. +Identified with Walter. The story which was doubted +by John. The rescued natives. The Maloses. Ta +Babeda. The tribe to the north. Distributing the gifts. +The delight of the Chief. Telling him about the wonders +of Wonder Island. The invitation to the Chief.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">IX.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><span class="smcap">The Remarkable Cave Explorations</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_113">Page 113</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Umbolos, to the north. The supposed cannibals. +Determine to visit them. Preparing for the expedition. +Chief Ta Babeda cautions John against the cannibal +Chief Rumisses. John requests permission to take the +Korinos with him. He consents provided John will enter +the cave and take them. The trip to the cave. The +Chief accompanies John to the cave. Superstitions about +the caves. Why no one but the Korinos dare enter the +caves. The hill near the ocean. The cove near the entrance +of the cave. The flashlights. Lighting the caverns. +Evidences of habitations. The escape of the +Korinos. Following the trail. The outlet to the south. +Tracked to the north. Uraso and Muro follow the fugitives. +Their flight to the cannibal tribe. John and the +boys return to explore the cave. A new series of caverns. +A succession of four chambers. A large round +chamber at the end of the lead. A mound in the center +of the chamber. Removing the material in the mound. +Discovery of the copper box. Peculiar character of the +box.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">X.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><span class="smcap">The Tribe to the North</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_125">Page 125</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The copper box taken to the ship. News from Uraso and +Muro. Explaining mesmerism and hypnotism. Concentration. +The effect on susceptible minds. The Korinos +safe with the cannibal tribe. John advises Stut to sail, +north for twenty miles, and await their coming. The +march. The cinnamon tree. Cinnamon suet. Minerals. +Sulphates. Copper ores. Omens. All peoples believe in +signs and omens. The shelter for the night. How signals +were made. Sighting the cannibal village. Earthenware +cooking utensils. Meet the first natives. The +dreaded Chief. A curious figure. The hunchback. A +smile on his face. The American greeting. The surprise. +A white man. Finding the Korinos. The welcome +to his village. The Chief told about their ship. +On the island fifty years. Telling John about the +strange things which have floated ashore from wrecked +ships. The Korinos assured of safety.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><span class="smcap">The Hunchback Chief</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_138">Page 138</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The Chief's house. The relics from the sea. The hunchback +Chief's story. His trip as a whaler. Ill treatment. +Runs away. Ships to China. His rudimentary education. +Shipwrecked on the return from China. Rescued +by native cannibals. Regard him with veneration. +Misinterprets their motives. In desperation. Asserts +himself. Becomes Chief of the tribe. Stops cannibal +practices. His great influence over the people. The +<i>Pioneer</i> arrives. Ephraim Wilmar, the hunchback. His +surprise at the many changes during fifty years. His +amazement at the telephone, the cable lines, the phonograph.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><span class="smcap">The Chief's Family</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_148">Page 148</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Ephraim's wife. The family. The gifts to Ephraim's +family. Delight at the cooking utensils. John tells +Ephraim about the treasures on the islands. Hidden +treasures. Learning the secrets of early humanity. +Archeology. The trip to the cave. The long journey. +The cave which had the entrances sealed by Ephraim. +The peculiar kinds of masonry. Entering the cave. Dogs +with the party. Mysterious death of the dogs. The +alarm of the natives. Carbonic gas. Its nature, and +how tested. Methods for removing it. The Humphrey +Davy lamp. The principle on which it is made. Designed +to indicate the presence of deadly gases. Explosive +mixtures. How a primitive safety lamp was made. +Reëntering the cave. A large chamber. The cross-shaped +cave. A parchment. The object of John's search.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><span class="smcap">The Chart and the Caves</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_164">Page 164</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The map accompanying the parchment. One of the +Treasure caves. Remarkable carvings, and hieroglyphics. +The quarrel of the buccaneers. The story of the +Spaniard who wrote the chart. The expeditions searching +for the treasure. Death of all who participated. +Great archeological wealth. No material treasures found. +How Ephraim's story affected the boys. John explains +why the cannibals feared him. Due to their superstitions. +Demented people regarded by some as saints. Genius and +insanity. Further explorations of the island. The proposed +trip to Wonder Island. Ephraim invited. He and +his family accept. Telling Ephraim about Hutoton. +The curious tales that were told them about the convict +colony. The wonderful character of the people at Hutoton. +The <i>Pioneer</i> sails. The first time on the deck of a +vessel for fifty-two years. Ephraim and the library. His +conversation with the head of the convict colony. The +identity of the paralyzed man not established.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XIV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><span class="smcap">Rescue Island</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_175">Page 175</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>The visitors at Hutoton received with rejoicing. John +invites the leader to accompany them to Wonder Island. +Retlaw, the captive, rescued, brought ashore. Caramo +thought he recognized him. Sailing of the <i>Pioneer</i> for +Wonder Island. Calling at the Malolo village. Ta Babeda +agrees to accompany them to Wonder Island. +Naming the island Rescue. The latitude and longitude +noted. Introducing Ta Babeda to the cannibal Chief +Ephraim. He explains how the Korinos misrepresented +him and his people. The new world to Babeda when he +stepped on board the <i>Pioneer</i>. The trip to Wonder +Island. The mysteries on board the ship to the Chief. +His inquisitive nature. How he characterized electricity. +Ephraim's concern for his children. Approaching Enterprise +River. The steamship <i>Wonder</i> in sight. The greeting. +Going up the river. The excitement in Unity. +The crowded dock. Sutoto and his bride. The flag on +the <i>Wonder</i>. The curiosity of Beralsea at the sight of the +Banners.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><span class="smcap">The Return to Wonder Island</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_187">Page 187</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Sutoto and the great wide world. Their trip to Valparaiso. +Cinda, and the latest fashions. Blakely, the man +of business. The boys tell him of the wonderful islands. +His eagerness. He tells them of the great enterprises, +and of the prospective new ship. The growth of Unity. +The tribesmen coming in. Introducing Blakely to the +Chiefs. They marvel at his energy. The Professor. John +tells him about the copper box. The new hotel. The +wonderful work in Unity. Agricultural pursuits. What +they shipped to the north. The plans for surveying the +islands. How the lands were apportioned. Building +homes on the island. Energy of the natives. Emigration +pouring in. Farm implements. Coffee tree planting. +Raising cocoa. The schools. The Korinos as +teachers. Explaining the trade problems to the Chief. +Ephraim's desire to have his children remain and attend +school. The Chief also permits his children to remain. +Information that the paralyzed man is getting well. +What paralysis is. The triangle. The visit of the boys +to Sutoto's home. The new automobile. The surprise +for the boys.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XVI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><span class="smcap">The Savages at Unity</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_199">Page 199</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Their new machines. Blakely's treat for the boys. +The Professor's car. John in his runabout. The automobile +procession. The Chief and the automobile. The cottage +for the Chief's family. The boys and the Professor +review their work. The great pleasure in their enterprises. +George and Harry selected to manage affairs on +Venture and Rescue Islands. The copper box. The skull +in the package. The Professor announces the return of +the reason of the paralytic. The word "triangle" announced +by the paralytic. The remarkable coincidence. +Opening the copper box. The triangle on the Walter letter. +The skull within the copper box. The cryptic signs +in the box. The counterpart of the skull they had found. +The identical inscription. The agitation of the paralytic +at the sight. He mentions the name of Walter. Retlaw +enters and starts at the sight of the skulls. Tries to +escape on seeing the paralytic. The latter announces his +name as Clifford. Harry rightly judges that <i>Retlaw</i> is +<i>Walter</i> reversed. Ephraim recognizes Clifford. Walter +arrested.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XVII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><span class="smcap">Unraveling the Mysteries</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_214">Page 214</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Speculations concerning Walter. Sutoto informed. The +mystery of their missing boat. Clifford's story. The +paper with the markings on the skull identified by Ta +Babeda. The secret in possession of Walter. The boys' +suggestion as to proper names for the natives. Surnames, +and how originated. The method adopted by the +Romans. The Greek names. English surnames. Clifford's +condition improving. Trying to identify the skeleton +found on Venture Island. Clifford recognizes +Ephraim. Walter's letter. The three islands. The triangle. +The three southern stars. The southern cross. +The three crosses. Thirty leagues. The charts of the +islands.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">XVIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Lettered Skull</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_224">Page 224</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>Clifford awakes. The escape of Walter and his recapture. +Clifford continues his story. His effort to find the +treasure island. His meeting with Walter. Capture by +the savages. The <i>Juan Ferde</i>. Blakely and Clifford. +His knowledge of the skull. The finding of the boys' +boat. Sailing down the river. Loss of the boat. Finding +his companions. Sailing to Venture Island. His +illness. Meeting with Walter on Rescue Island. His belief +that Walter had hidden the chart. Walter brought +in. Clifford apologizes to Walter. The Sign of the Plus +and V. The chambers in the cave. What the inscriptions +meant. Surprise when Walter learns of the finding +of the copper box. Explains the meaning of the +charts. Why there were three skulls. The mysterious +letter. The remarkable happenings explained.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> + +<h3>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h3> +<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations"> +<col style="width:75%;" /> +<col style="width:25%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left">The scout from the rear now came in with a leap</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-003">Frontispiece</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> + <td class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-060">59</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">'It is copper,' said John</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-142">138</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">The old man pointed to the rocky wall</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-160">154</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> + <td class="pr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 1. The Marimba.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-037">36</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-043">42</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-046">45</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 4. Silencer: Convolute Blades.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-055">54</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-078">75</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-079">76</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 7. The Mistletoe.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-093">90</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 8. The Jacchus.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-097">95</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-122">119</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 10. Cinnamon.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-132">129</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-152">146</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 12. Types of Masonry.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-159">154</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-166">159</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">Fig. 14. How John made the Lamp.</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-167">160</a></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_15" id="p_15" href="#p_15">p. 15</a></span></p> +<h2>TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</h2> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>THE PECULIAR SIGNALS</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>"Do</span> you remember, Harry, after discovering the +treasure and the skeletons of the pirates in the cave +near the Cataract, that we heard the doleful sound +of some bird while going down the hill?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; that cry was something like it. Do you recall +the name of the bird, George?"</p> + +<p>"It was the Alma Perdita."</p> + +<p>"I remember, now; it means the 'Cry of the Lost +Soul.'"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but I don't think that came from a bird. +It is more like an animal of some kind. Don't you +hear a sound that seems to be answering it?"</p> + +<p>"It does seem so; I think John would know what +animal it is; but it is too late to speak to him about +it to-night, George."</p> + +<p>As Harry ceased speaking, the boys heard a noise, +and George arose holding up his hand as a warning. +"I think I see something, so we ought to call John."</p> + +<p>The boys quietly moved forward, and noted two +figures moving about a short distance beyond. The +boys crawled over to the place where John was sleep<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_16" id="p_16" href="#p_16">p. 16</a></span>ing, +and found that the place he occupied, as well as +that of Uraso's vacant.</p> + +<p>"That must be John and Uraso over there," remarked +Harry in a whisper.</p> + +<p>They were confirmed in this on approaching the +moving figures, and saw that both were armed, and +also that they were watching another moving figure +beyond.</p> + +<p>"Is that a bird or an animal?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"An animal," replied John, in an undertone.</p> + +<p>"That was my opinion from the first," remarked +George, who turned to Harry with a sort of 'I told +you so,' expression.</p> + +<p>"But it is a two-legged animal," responded John.</p> + +<p>"How long have you been up?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"More than an hour," said Uraso. "Muro is now +coming back, and we shall know something more definite."</p> + +<p>"Then that is Muro?" asked George, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Yes; he has been stalking the ones making that +noise, and was the one who called our attention to +it."</p> + +<p>Muro disappeared, and the peculiar cries were repeated, +then, most startlingly, a sound, similar in +character, appeared to come from a point very close +to where they were now crouching.</p> + +<p>John turned to Uraso in astonishment. The latter +did not seem at all perturbed, but after the second +cry Uraso imitated the sound, and John smiled.</p> + +<p>"Muro has the exact tone now," said John.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Uraso, "and the cry I gave was an +answer, which Uraso understands."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes Muro appeared, but he was not<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_17" id="p_17" href="#p_17">p. 17</a></span> +smiling. His face was grave, as he said: "We have +come upon the terrible Konotos. I feared that when +I heard the first cry several hours ago."</p> + +<p>"Have you been near them?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Near enough to know that there are quite a number, +and what is more, they are now engaged in their +regular feast, and if they have any captives, this is +the time that they will be sacrificed," said Muro.</p> + +<p>"Why do you think this is the time for that?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Because it was now nearing the <i>dark of the moon</i>, +as you call it, and that time is chosen because the +Great Spirit, out of anger, is hiding the light."</p> + +<p>The boys now understood that this was a rite practiced +by some of the tribes on Wonder Island, during +that season of the Moon's phase.</p> + +<p>"Did you talk with them in that strange language?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"No; but I tried to find out the key to the language +they used."</p> + +<p>"Is that their regular language?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, no! That is simply the special language +which they use on certain occasions," answered +Muro.</p> + +<p>"The savages here, as everywhere, have a sort of +code language, or a species of wireless telegraphy, +used by them only when in the presence of enemies," +commented John.</p> + +<p>"Harry and I thought it might be the Alma Perdita, +that we heard at the cave near Cataract."</p> + +<p>"No; but it shows the ingenuity of the savages, +when I explain that their most favored method is to +assume the cry of some bird or animal, and in so<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_18" id="p_18" href="#p_18">p. 18</a></span> +doing make it difficult for the enemy to distinguish +the assumed from the real."</p> + +<p>"But on Wonder Island we had several methods +of talking to each other," remarked Uraso. "For +instance, we would perfectly imitate the cries of a +number of birds, and also of certain animals, and of +the wood insects. Thus, a nightingale would mean +<i>watchfulness</i>; the chirrup of a cricket would be the +signal that the enemy was not dangerous, or that +there were not many of them; the cry of the Lost +Soul bird would indicate that there was great danger, +and so on with the birds and animals that make +noises."</p> + +<p>"But I have discovered another thing," remarked +Muro.</p> + +<p>"And what is that?" said John.</p> + +<p>"The natives here are cannibals."</p> + +<p>"That merely confirms my knowledge of the matter," +said John.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at John in amazement. How did +John know there were cannibals on the island?</p> + +<p>"When did you learn that?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yesterday," was his reply.</p> + +<p>"What did you find that makes you believe that?"</p> + +<p>"I discovered a bone which was once part of a +human body."</p> + +<p>"But how would that be any indication that the +people here are cannibals?"</p> + +<p>"When you see a bone that has on it the unmistakable +markings of human teeth, it is pretty safe to +infer that the animal which scratched the bone was +a cannibal."</p> + +<p>From the report of Muro it was evident that there<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_19" id="p_19" href="#p_19">p. 19</a></span> +was a large number of people on the island, and, if +Muro's observations were correct, they now had some +captives, or, at least, were preparing to celebrate a +feast in which human beings were to be the victims.</p> + +<p>"That satisfies me of one thing," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"And what is that?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Why, that there must be other tribes on the island," +he answered.</p> + +<p>"Why do you infer that?"</p> + +<p>"Well, where would they get the victims?"</p> + +<p>"From their own people," answered John.</p> + +<p>"What! eat their own people?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"That is not at all strange. Many people are +known to sacrifice their own, and among the most +degraded, they are known to kill and eat their own."</p> + +<p>"That is the first time I have heard of such a +thing."</p> + +<p>"Don't you remember that the Bible tells about +Abraham about to offer up his own son as a sacrifice?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but not to eat him."</p> + +<p>"Of course not; but it is not an uncommon thing +for tribes in Africa to sell their own children for this +purpose. One of the greatest sacrificial rites of the +ancient Mexicans, was to offer up the most handsome +youth each year, as a propitiation to the gods."</p> + +<p>"So they do not always depend on their enemies to +furnish the feast?"</p> + +<p>"By no means. Many of the tribes have a superstition +that if they eat a brave enemy it will impart to +them his spirit of valor, and the fact that they are +to have sacrifices here does not mean that there are +various tribes on the island; but that is something we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_20" id="p_20" href="#p_20">p. 20</a></span> +shall have to investigate. It is my opinion that we +shall find other tribes, but that, I am inclined to +think, depends upon the size of the island."</p> + +<hr class='sorta' /> + +<p>The preceding volume, "Adventures Among +Strange Islands," states the conditions under which +the two boys, Harry and George, found themselves +on a strange island, in the southern Pacific. Accompanying +them were John L. Varney, and about +sixty natives from Wonder Island, together with the +two Chiefs Uraso and Muro.</p> + +<p>Nearly three years previously the boys, George +Mayfield and Harry Crandall, who were members +of the crew of a school-ship, the <i>Investigator</i> sailed +from New York, and while on board, met a professor, +who, when the ship was blown up at sea, became their +companion in the life boat in which they sought +refuge. Together they finally were stranded upon +an unknown island, less than a hundred miles from +the island which was the scene of the adventures with +which we are now concerned.</p> + +<p>On this island they discovered five or six savage +tribes, from some of which they rescued seven of +their former boy companions. Here also they met +Mr. Varney, who had escaped from the savages. +The Professor succeeded in reconciling all the warring +tribes, and the natives were now engaged in +agriculture, and in various other pursuits, and the +boys had the great pleasure and satisfaction of being +able to build their own vessel and return home. The +trip to the Wonderful island, with which this volume +deals, was for a double purpose, as will presently be +shown.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_21" id="p_21" href="#p_21">p. 21</a></span></p> + +<p>John, as Mr. Varney was familiarly known to them, +was not only a well educated man, but a great adventurer, +and had traveled all over the world in pursuit +of scientific knowledge. He was particularly interested +in the history of the men who first went to +the western world, and scattered civilization to the +benighted countries.</p> + +<p>Like many men of his character, he did not consider +the question of money. He tried to acquire +knowledge and information for the love of the quest, +and in order to be of service to his fellow man, so +it was purely by accident that he became a member +of a crew that sailed for the southern seas at the +same time that the boys left New York on their trip.</p> + +<p>While his companions undertook the mission solely +for the sake of the money which might be acquired, +John engaged thinking it might offer the means of +laying bare many of the early legends and vague historical +accounts with which that region of the South +Seas abounds, and he knew that if any records were +in existence, they could be preserved only in such +secure places as caverns, which the Spanish buccaneers +invariably selected as the safest places to conceal +their treasures.</p> + +<p>While the boys, together with the Professor and +John, had found a vast amount of treasure, as stated +in the first six volumes containing the history of +Wonder Island, they found not a single scrap of historical +value, excepting a few traces, which have been +referred to, and certain inscriptions which all pointed +to the same depositary, somewhere in the South Seas.</p> + +<p>The last inscription was found by John, shortly +before they left Wonder Island, and which, though<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_22" id="p_22" href="#p_22">p. 22</a></span> +its full meaning was wrapt in mystery, pointed, as +did the others, to another island than the one on +which it was found. What made the matter still +more interesting, was the knowledge that some one, +by the name of Walters, either had prepared the inscription, +or had some knowledge of what it meant.</p> + +<p>This man was not known to any of the party, and +what made it the more remarkable was the information, +lately obtained, that while Walters, apparently, +knew one of the companions who accompanied John +on his wrecked vessel, that man did not know Walters, +at least not by that name.</p> + +<p>These circumstances, together with numerous +other incidents, which the boys could not understand, +or unravel, made such an impression on them, that +they were determined to devote their energies to ferret +out the inexplicable things, and the earnestness +of John was a great incentive in the undertaking.</p> + +<p>Up to this time the boys did not know the real motive +in the mind of John. To them this quest on his +part was to find out where the Treasure islands were +for the material value that might be obtained.</p> + +<p>His long silence about the real design had been +purposely concealed by him, as he felt that merely to +delve into the hidden recesses of the islands would +not be understood by them in its real sense, because +as boys they could not appreciate that real knowledge +always must be disassociated from the idea of +material or commercial gain.</p> + +<p>It was with a great deal of anxiety that the boys +waited for the morning sun. They had but a comparatively +small force to deal with the situation. +True, they were equipped with fire-arms, and they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_23" id="p_23" href="#p_23">p. 23</a></span> +knew that the <i>Pioneer</i>, their vessel, would return +within a week, still, within that time the large number +of natives might be able to surround them, and +unless they could get some word to the ship, and by +that means enable their friends to send reinforcements, +they would be starved out.</p> + +<p>As soon as the camp was astir there was a consultation. +John had fully matured a plan in his mind, +but it was always a pleasure, as it had been with the +Professor, to present any complications to the boys, +so that they could take a hand in the developments +which might follow.</p> + +<p>"Harry and I have been considering the matter," +said George. "We think it would be well to leave +this place, and go back to the landing and wait for the +<i>Pioneer</i>. We will then be ready, with reinforcements +to meet them with more than an even chance."</p> + +<p>"But," remarked John; "are you willing to go +back, and permit the devils here to destroy the captives +they may have, or, to prevent them from sacrificing +their own people?"</p> + +<p>The boys had not thought of this. "I know the +feast days, during which these events will take place, +will occur within the next four days," added Muro.</p> + +<p>"If that is so," said Harry, "I am willing to do +my share in keeping them from it. What do you +suggest?"</p> + +<p>"We must try to get into communication with +them, and if we fail then I am in favor of taking some +stringent measures to divert them from their purpose," +answered John.</p> + +<p>"Then you may be assured we are with you to the +end," said George.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_24" id="p_24" href="#p_24">p. 24</a></span></p> + +<p>"After talking with Uraso and Muro, we have +agreed on a plan that may be successful, and it will +at any rate, for the time, prevent them from carrying +out their festival scheme." As John said this Muro +appeared, and stated that he had discovered the arrival +of at least a hundred natives on the hill beyond +the second ravine, and that he saw smoke on the third +hill beyond that, and was of the opinion that the village +must not be far away.</p> + +<p>This intelligence added interest to the situation. +As nearly as could be estimated they were at least +fifteen miles from the landing place selected when the +<i>Pioneer</i> sailed.</p> + +<p>"Unless I am very much mistaken the ridge on +which we now are is the backbone of the island, and I +also believe that it is narrow and we should be able +to find the sea much nearer by going east from this +place," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"But if we do that it will be necessary for some one +to go to the place selected for the landing of the +<i>Pioneer</i>, and tell them of our plans, and what we +have learned," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"That is what I have in mind. But before doing +that we must investigate this portion of the island +more carefully. My plan is as follows: Along this +ridge, further to the east, is a sheltered spot, or a +place where the rocks form a sort of cove, and which +can be easily defended. If the natives have not +reached that quarter it will make an ideal retreat for +us, and where we can defend ourselves for an indefinite +time."</p> + +<p>"But why should we take up time to find a place<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_25" id="p_25" href="#p_25">p. 25</a></span> +like that if you intend to take steps toward meeting +the natives?"</p> + +<p>"It will be used to fall back upon."</p> + +<p>"Oh, then you intend to take measures against +them at once?"</p> + +<p>"Not for the first day, at least. As soon as we are +established there we will investigate the region to the +east, and if we find the shore line closer on the eastern +shore, we can then send a runner with a message +to the landing place, giving them the information."</p> + +<p>The boys now understood. It was evident that it +would have been bad policy to retreat in face of the +enemy, if such he should prove to be. Something +must be done to divert the natives for the time being. +This would give them time to communicate with their +vessel.</p> + +<p>"There is one thing that must be remembered. +The savages know of our presence here. They are +now on the alert, and we are being watched with the +greatest vigilance. If they think there is an opportunity +for fresh victims it will stimulate them to the +greatest exertions."</p> + +<p>"I agree with you in that view," said Uraso, as +John finished speaking.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_26" id="p_26" href="#p_26">p. 26</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL</h3> + + +<p><span class="smcap">After</span> a hurried breakfast the party marched +along the southern crest of the hill, keeping as much +out of view of the watchers on the northern side as +possible. The course adopted was one well calculated +to deceive the natives, for while the main bulk +of the party silently left the camping place, a half +dozen of their companions were left behind, and they +were particular to remain exposed at intervals, so +that the departure of the main party would not be +discovered.</p> + +<p>To those left behind, John said: "Remain here until +you hear firing. In that event you will know that +we have met them, and that fact will be sufficient notice +that your duty here is at an end. Uraso has +begged the privilege of being with you, and you know +that is an assurance of your safety in any event."</p> + +<p>The place suggested by John was not over two +miles distant. Muro went ahead with one of the +most reliable men of his tribe, and at intervals this +runner was sent back with the information that the +course was clear.</p> + +<p>Everything pointed to the success of the scheme, +until they were within sight of the place, when the +runner came back hurriedly with the information +that Muro had seen the first of the natives, and he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_27" id="p_27" href="#p_27">p. 27</a></span> +felt certain that they were at the place selected for +their fort.</p> + +<p>The party halted. The runner returned, and John +sent back a messenger to Uraso, advising him to come +forward at once. Within fifteen minutes the messenger +returned with the startling information that +the natives were between them and Uraso.</p> + +<p>This was, indeed, surprising. Either they were +experts at stalking enemies, or they had been fortunate +enough to bring up a force in such a position as +to make Uraso's escape a most hazardous one.</p> + +<p>"We must make the best of the situation," said +John. "Let us prepare to receive them, if they are +determined to attack us."</p> + +<p>"But what shall we do about Uraso?" asked +Harry, in some consternation.</p> + +<p>"I think Uraso knows how to take care of the +situation. He is shrewd enough to outwit them, and +if there is any danger from that quarter, he will let +us know."</p> + +<p>"But how can he let us know if his messenger cannot +get through?"</p> + +<p>John smiled, as he looked at George, and responded: +"You have evidently forgotten that Uraso +has the best signaling instrument in the world, the +gun."</p> + +<p>"Certainly; I had forgotten that. But what shall +we do if—" His voice was cut short by a shot from +the direction of Uraso's position.</p> + +<p>"There it is," said Harry. "Two more shots!"</p> + +<p>The scout from the rear now came in on a leap. +"They are coming this way," he hurriedly informed +John.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_28" id="p_28" href="#p_28">p. 28</a></span></p> + +<p>"Who are coming?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"The natives."</p> + +<p>"Lie down!" he commanded. "No one must fire +until I give the command. Oto, go to Muro at once, +and tell him to come back immediately."</p> + +<p>In the distance to the west could be seen little +squads of natives coming directly toward them. In +the different groups were fully fifteen men, all armed +with spears and bows and arrows.</p> + +<p>"Uraso is driving them this way; I am sure of +that," remarked John, as he watched their maneuvers.</p> + +<p>"What makes you think so?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"They are simply retreating, thinking, in all probability +that they have met our entire band. They do +not know we are here."</p> + +<p>"Brave Uraso! I hope he will not get into danger," +said George. "There they are now; see them +on the ridge to—"</p> + +<p>A shot from the direction of Muro now awoke them +to action. The moment that sound reached the oncoming +savages, they halted, and huddled together, +evidently in confusion at the meaning of the new +alarm.</p> + +<p>"Ah! they are puzzled!" Then, after a pause, +he continued: "I hope Muro is not in trouble! I +do not understand why his messenger has not returned."</p> + +<p>Within ten minutes of the report of the gun which +has just been referred to, the messenger sent by +John, came in and stated that it was impossible for +him to reach Muro, as the hill directly to the east +was alive with warriors.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_29" id="p_29" href="#p_29">p. 29</a></span></p> + +<p>It was now Muro's turn to get the sympathy of the +boys, and both of them turned to John, who still +seemed unperturbed.</p> + +<p>"We will march directly to the east," he announced. +"Every man must hold his gun ready for +instant firing. Move forward quietly, as you have +been doing. We must go to the assistance of Muro. +Uraso will take care of the rear."</p> + +<p>They glided along the crest, directly behind John, +and as they passed over the hill, it was evident that +the natives were out in force.</p> + +<p>"I wonder whether they have captured Muro?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"No; he is all right. You may depend on it that +he will not be taken without a warning shot is given."</p> + +<p>"But we heard a shot."</p> + +<p>"True; but that was the messenger."</p> + +<p>From the manner in which the natives in their +front were scurrying to and fro, it was apparent to +John's practiced mind, they had no idea of the approach +of John and his party. It was plain that they +knew of Muro, or, at least of some one beyond the second +hill, where John inferred Muro must have gone, +because all their energies appeared to be directed toward +that point.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid they are after Muro, but I am sure +if he finds himself in danger he will fire a shot to +warn us. In such a situation we must attract their +attention. I will detail the first squad to accompany +me. All those remaining will conceal themselves, +and under no circumstances show yourselves, or let +your presence be known, unless you are attacked. +We will go to the point beyond the two large trees,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_30" id="p_30" href="#p_30">p. 30</a></span> +and make the demonstration there, thus drawing +them away from Muro."</p> + +<p>John with the six men designated hurried over the +intervening ground, just as two shots, undoubtedly +from Muro, broke the quiet, and placed the watchers +on the alert. In less than ten minutes the boys heard +a volley to the right, and almost instantly the opposite +slope was alive with natives running to and fro +in all directions, and the most peculiar cries were +heard, while in the distance there was a singular +rhythmic sound as though drums were being beaten, +in regular time.</p> + +<p>It sounded very weird and fascinating. The +drums, if such they were, had different keys, and +their companions did not appear to be able to give +any information about them.</p> + +<p>While thus waiting for John to appear, the watchers +were surprised to see the force which was between +Uraso and themselves, rushing alongside the hill, and +directly toward their place of concealment. Here +was a problem, not contemplated by John, and the +boys consulted the men with them.</p> + +<p>Harry said: "I will do what has always been our +custom, that is first show ourselves, and indicate +that we do not wish to be enemies, and try to gain +their confidence."</p> + +<p>"I think some of the men should try to talk to +them. It is possible that they may be acquainted +with their language. You remember the one we captured +could understand what Muro said," suggested +George.</p> + +<p>It should be stated that after they landed on the +island, four days previously, they had made a short<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_31" id="p_31" href="#p_31">p. 31</a></span> +excursion into the interior, where they were attacked +by a tribe, of which one of the men was captured, +after being wounded, and then taken by the Professor +on board the <i>Pioneer</i>, and carried to Wonder Island.</p> + +<p>The savages came forward apparently without +knowing of the existence of our party, and when +within two hundred feet Harry, and Tarra, one of the +most intelligent of the islanders, stepped forward, +and waved their hands.</p> + +<p>The natives stopped in astonishment. Tarra +spoke to them, but they were mute. Then Tarra +turned to Harry, and rubbed his nose, and made a +sign of friendship. After some hesitation the leader, +who was, from all appearance a chief, answered, that +they demanded the delivery to them of the wounded +man. After this was interpreted Harry assured him +that the man would be restored safe and sound, as +soon as he was cured.</p> + +<p>At this information the Chief told Tarra that he +lied, and that he had been taken for the purpose of +being sacrificed. He was assured that such was not +the case, as they did not believe in sacrificing human +beings.</p> + +<p>The Chief then demanded that they leave the island +at once, or they would kill all of them. Tarra +laughed at this announcement, and his demeanor was +such as to astound the natives. "You do not know +what you say," said Tarra. "The white people who +are with us have fire guns, which kill when they +speak," and he held up one of them, and the boys +were amused to see how quickly they began to waver +and look about for shelter.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_32" id="p_32" href="#p_32">p. 32</a></span></p> + +<p>"We have not come here to injure you," said +Tarra. "We want to be friends."</p> + +<p>This appeal did not affect the Chief, but seeing his +men disappear he silently withdrew to the north. +They had scarcely gone before Uraso and his men +appeared in the tall grass beyond, and were most +heartily welcomed by the boys.</p> + +<p>Uraso laughed as he related their experience. He +said that the band came up, after John and the party +left, and in order to make as big a showing as possible +he and his companions hid in the grass, being +separated from each other twenty feet or more, thus +making a line over a hundred feet in length.</p> + +<p>The savages did not know that the entire line was +occupied only by seven men. To all appearances the +waving of the grass at the different points along the +line, indicated to them the presence of a large force. +As a result they started for the east, instead of going +to the south, as Uraso had calculated they would do, +and which indeed they would have done had they not +heard the peculiar savage-made signals of the party +which was hunting Muro.</p> + +<p>The movement of the band in that direction drove +them directly toward the watchers who had been left +behind by John, and for them to meet a second party, +immediately after they left Uraso, must have been +a most astonishing thing to them.</p> + +<p>But the savages were still more confounded, when, +after leaving the boys, they learned from the signals +that a third party (the one with John), was still further +to the east.</p> + +<p>The first evidence the boys had, that the last party +had reached the main band of savages, was the re<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_33" id="p_33" href="#p_33">p. 33</a></span>currence +of the same peculiar sounds that were heard +during the night.</p> + +<p>"They are telling them that we are all over the +island. They are worried about the situation," said +Uraso. "John purposely took the men forward in +order to create the impression that our people might +be found everywhere."</p> + +<p>"Did you hear the shots that Muro fired?" asked +George.</p> + +<p>"Yes; they were on all sides of him, undoubtedly, +but I am satisfied he is all right now."</p> + +<p>"What makes you think so?"</p> + +<p>"For the reason that the natives are retreating, +and dare not attack him. The last signs were those +indicating danger. They were entirely different +from those sent out last night."</p> + +<p>The peculiar drum beats ceased. Only occasionally +could the plaintive signal cry be heard, and after +waiting for more than half hour, the boys were delighted +to see John and Muro appear on the distant +hill, accompanied by the men who were detailed with +him.</p> + +<p>Muro's story was an interesting one. He went directly +east for a distance of nearly two miles, passing +between two different parties, who were, of +course, unaware of his presence. He sent the messenger +back when he met the first natives, and when +this messenger was on his way back he found the +savages before him, and they made a rush which +he stopped by the shot which John and the boys +heard.</p> + +<p>After he had passed the second lot of natives he +ascended the second hill, and beheld, far in the east,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_34" id="p_34" href="#p_34">p. 34</a></span> +the open sea. This, he knew, was a matter of prime +importance to them, as he felt assured it could not be +more than five miles distant.</p> + +<p>While investigating the shore line, in order to select +some particular marking point, by means of +which they might be able to direct the <i>Pioneer</i>, he +was surrounded by the natives. Not that they knew +he was at that particular place, but, as he was now +near the rocky headland which he was seeking, it +occurred to him that they might be going on the same +mission, and before he could extricate himself a small +band intercepted him.</p> + +<p>He told them that they were friends and not enemies, +and tried to win them over by promises of +reward. For some reason or other they declined to +treat with him, and he then had to resort to the rifle +to impress them with the invisible power which he +possessed.</p> + +<p>This was done by the two shots which the boys +heard. They were of course awed by the explosion, +and by the effect of the shots, and since it did not +seem to bring about the desired results, he coolly +marched away, and told them that they dared not +follow him.</p> + +<p>His bravery undoubtedly proved his salvation, for +they were too much astounded to move at his audacity. +He did not go far, because he knew that his +safety lay in keeping himself concealed, since he felt +assured that it would not be long before John would +resort to some device to attract their attention.</p> + +<p>His calculations were justified, for within a quarter +of an hour he heard the volley which John ordered, +and in an in creditable short space of time the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_35" id="p_35" href="#p_35">p. 35</a></span> +woods were cleared of the watching natives, who, undoubtedly, +were on the alert to capture him.</p> + +<p>"The boys went with me to the foot of the hill," +said John. "I knew Muro would fire three shots if +he were in danger. When we were half way up the +hill, we saw the natives stealthily moving around +the hill, as though trying to encircle the position +among the rocks. It was enough to indicate to me +that Muro was the one they were stalking.</p> + +<p>"We did not shoot at the natives, but intended it +merely as a warning. It was sufficient, for they made +for cover at once, and within ten minutes we heard +Muro's signal, and found him safe."</p> + +<p>"But isn't that fine about the sea?" said Harry +with enthusiasm.</p> + +<p>"Yes; and that means we must now send a message +to the landing place. Muro, did you see enough +of the shore line to enable you to describe it?" asked +John.</p> + +<p>"I was not near enough to tell exactly, but I believe +it is directly east of our landing place, but, +of course, on the opposite side of the island," was +his response.</p> + +<p>"That will be near enough. Our work is on this +side of the island. As soon as we have quieted down +a little you will hear some news," said John as he +glanced at the boys significantly.</p> + +<p>The runner was directed to proceed to the landing +place, and to remain there during the night. He was +then to return the first thing in the morning, and +would find the party camped at the rocky height beyond.</p> + +<p>Without waiting for further explanations, and de<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_36" id="p_36" href="#p_36">p. 36</a></span>tails +of experiences, they started for the place where +they might find some shelter from the numerous foes, +and at which place they might be able to formulate +a plan to get into communication with the natives.</p> + +<p>It was late in the afternoon when they gained the +rocky heights, and saw the wild nature of the surroundings.</p> + +<p>"How did you know this place was here?" asked +Harry.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;"> +<a name="illus-037" id="illus-037"></a> +<a href="#p_37"> +<img src="images/illus-037-fig1.png" width="366" height="199" +alt="Fig. 1. The Marimba." title="Fig. 1. The Marimba." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 1. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Marimba</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"I was here day before yesterday, and it was from +this place we started when we heard your first guns +in the battle you had with the natives," was John's +answer.</p> + +<p>"But how does it happen that you did not see the +ocean?"</p> + +<p>"Well, are you able to see the ocean anywhere +from this point?" he was asked.</p> + +<p>The question was a natural one, for when Muro +came over the last hill to the south the sea was visible, +but the rocky point was to the north, and thus out of +range.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_37" id="p_37" href="#p_37">p. 37</a></span></p> + +<p>"Did you hear the singular drum-like sounds this +afternoon?"</p> + +<p>"They were drums," answered John, "and most +peculiar ones, too. I have not seen the ones used +by the natives here, but they have the same resonant +sounds made by certain African tribes, and also by +some South American savages."</p> + +<p>"What is it like?" was Harry's next question.</p> + +<p>"They are made of flat pieces of wood, very thin, +laid over open-topped gourds. The gourds are, of +course, dried, and the dryer they are, the more resonant +the sound."</p> + +<p>"Why, that is something like the Xylophone."</p> + +<p>"Exactly so. That instrument is of savage origin. +Instead of gourds some tribes use calabashes, which +grow to enormous size, and they are highly prized +owing to the quality of the sound they produce when +used in this way."</p> + +<p>"But the ones we heard had different tones."</p> + +<p>"They use wooden strips of different lengths, exactly +like the Xylophone. They are called Marimbas, +balafongs and sansas, by the various tribes."</p> + +<p>While George, Harry and Uraso, were scouting to +the north they unexpectedly came around the corner +of a hill, from which they could see a beautiful +valley running to the north, and directly opposite, on +a little plateau, was a type of mountain deer, standing +like a sentinel near the precipitous edge, while below +were dozens feeding.</p> + +<p>The boys dared not shoot at them, but they remembered +the place, and made up their minds that as soon +as they had made friends of the natives they would +have a hunt in this section.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_38" id="p_38" href="#p_38">p. 38</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE</h3> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> most trying time for all adventurers and explorers, +is after night has set in. During the daytime +there is always plenty to take up one's attention +and energies, but as the sun goes down the world +seems to contract into a very small space, and when +enemies are near the burden of waiting is a doubly +trying one.</p> + +<p>The boys had spent many such nights. Whenever +John or the Professor were about these hours were +always enjoyed, because like all healthy boys, they +were ever on the alert to ask questions which happened +to be suggested by the experiences of the day.</p> + +<p>Now, it is a singular thing, that there is no selfishness +in education. True education is charitable. +Those who crave it with the most eagerness, are always +the foremost in wishing to impart it to others. +The honest learner does not resent the listening ear +of his fellow pupils.</p> + +<p>Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were the +first to conceive the advantages of education at the +hands of John and the Professor, were always on +the alert at the evening meetings, whenever their +duties permitted it, and hundreds of the natives of +Wonder Island craved the privilege of hearing the +conversations which took place on all sorts of topics.</p> + +<p>In Unity, the capital of Wonder Island, schools had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_39" id="p_39" href="#p_39">p. 39</a></span> +been established and were flourishing, and all the children +were pupils, so that within another generation +there would be a tremendous change for the better +among those people.</p> + +<p>There was nothing more enjoyable to the boys than +to see the intense interest manifested by the common +natives, when night came on, and they expected one +of the treats which they knew would be in store for +them.</p> + +<p>On these occasions George and Harry were usually +the questioners, but many times they saw that some +of the men seemed to desire additional information, +and by degrees the boys encouraged them to put the +questions, and to seek inquiries.</p> + +<p>This had a very stimulating effect. John was delighted +at the spirit thus developed, and he gave it a +still broader range by refusing sometimes to answer +the questions, and thus inviting answers from the +men themselves.</p> + +<p>Thus discussion developed. It taught them to begin +to think for themselves. If men know that the +ready answer is always at hand, it prevents the mind +from expanding. The evenings, therefore, were seasons +of enjoyment, alike to the men as well as to the +boys.</p> + +<p>After they had reached the cove in the rocks, and +all the dispositions had been made for the night, John +warned the men that while the natives were no doubt, +in consternation, the utmost care must be observed to +prevent any surprises.</p> + +<p>The moon had not yet arisen, but there was a beautiful +clear sky. The great Southern Cross hung in +the heavens like a giant lantern. On one side, and on<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_40" id="p_40" href="#p_40">p. 40</a></span> +line with each other, shone the two brightest stars in +the heavens, the first being the Dog Star Sirius, and +the next in order, Canopus, the one white, and the +other a yellowish white.</p> + +<p>Then, on the other side of the Great Cross, sparkled +Antares, the brilliant red star, of the first magnitude, +while Spica, another star made up a most remarkable +combination of heavenly orbs.</p> + +<p>George had always been impressed with the appearance +and the arrangement of the stars, and he +was struck by the intense interest which all savages +manifested in astronomy.</p> + +<p>"Your observations are correct," said John, when +the discussion began. "Almost all of the savage +rites, their feasts and religious ceremonials, have +something to do with the appearances and the movements +of the heavenly bodies."</p> + +<p>"I suppose the grouping of the stars, when they +named these groups of the planets after animals, and +the like, was done by the ancients, and really meant +something in a religious way," ventured Harry.</p> + +<p>"It is difficult really to determine the origin of +what is called the Zodiac. From the evidence attainable +it was known to the Babylonians, over 2300 years +before the Christian era. They divided the heavens +into twelve parts, each cluster of stars representing +some fanciful animal or being, such as the Lion, or +the Bear, or the Dragon."</p> + +<p>"Isn't it funny that the tribes here, as well as some +on Wonder Island have an idea that the dark moon is +caused by the Great Spirit trying to hide it in anger?" +asked George.</p> + +<p>"It is singular when it is considered that the same<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_41" id="p_41" href="#p_41">p. 41</a></span> +superstition is found in many, many tribes, on different +continents, and it induces the belief that this idea +had one common origin, and that the people all +sprang from one source, or, that the different peoples +worked out the ideas independently of each other."</p> + +<p>This statement caused considerable discussion, the +natives being of the opinion that the idea was worked +out by the different peoples and could not have been +spread broadcast by one set of people.</p> + +<p>"Why do you think it could not have come from +one race?" asked George, as Uraso urged.</p> + +<p>"Because," he answered, "how did the people in +olden times cross the big ocean? Even now, people +like my own, dare not venture on the sea, for any +distance from shore."</p> + +<p>"But," said John, "the surface of the earth was +not originally like it is now. In many places over the +earth, new lands have appeared,—that is, they come +up out of the sea, and other lands have disappeared. +We have records of islands, and parts of continents, +hundreds of times larger than Wonder Island, which +have disappeared in a single day. One of those, near +Japan, sank, and engulfed over 200,000 people."</p> + +<p>"You surprise me," said Muro.</p> + +<p>"Furthermore, there is pretty conclusive evidence +that the continents of Europe and America, were +once joined, or that there was an immense continent, +called Atlantis between the eastern and western hemispheres."</p> + +<p>"I read something on that subject some time ago, +in which the writer denied that such a thing was +possible," said Harry.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_42" id="p_42" href="#p_42">p. 42</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 360px;"> +<a id="illus-043" name="illus-043"></a> +<a href="#p_43"> +<img src="images/illus-043-fig2.png" width="360" height="572" +alt="Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau" title="Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 2. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Atlantean</span> <span class="u">Plateau</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"I am aware of that, but there are some things +<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_43" id="p_43" href="#p_43">p. 43</a></span> +which are difficult to explain, unless the two hemispheres +were once united, or, at any rate, were close +enough together to permit travel from one part to the +other."</p> + +<p>"What evidence is there on that point?"</p> + +<p>"Well, in the first place, the root of the languages +in Central America, and in Mexico, are the same as in +the corresponding latitude in Europe and Africa. +Then the Pyramids of Mexico are built on the same +plan, and located, astronomically, the same as those +in Egypt."</p> + +<p>"But could not the ancients have crossed the seas, +and in that way given the same knowledge to both sections?"</p> + +<p>"There is absolutely no evidence that the ancients +had vessels capable of traversing 2000 miles of +ocean."</p> + +<p>"But the book I read said that the Western Hemisphere +merely broke away from the main body of the +land, and that is why the people here knew all that +those in Europe had learned."</p> + +<p>"That is very plausible, and for the purpose of giving +you a fair understanding of the matter, I make +a sketch, showing (<a href="#illus-043">Fig. 2</a>), the Atlantean theory, in +which the western shores of Europe and Africa, and +the eastern shores of North and South America are +outlined, and between them, in dotted lines, is Atlantis, +the only part of that vast continent now being +visible being the Azore Islands, at the northern extremity."</p> + +<p>"But what evidence is there that such a continent +existed? Is it only a theory?"</p> + +<p>"It is supported by some evidence, much of which,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_44" id="p_44" href="#p_44">p. 44</a></span> +like the account which the Egyptian priests gave to +Solon, would take too long to state; but some years +ago, while Darwin was engaged in making the deep +sea soundings in the ship <i>Challenger</i>, it was found +that the bed of the Atlantic showed a raised plateau, +where the legendary Atlantis was claimed to be."</p> + +<p>"But might it not be possible that the other theory +could be correct, also,—that is, that North America +merely broke away, and in breaking away, left Atlantis +as an island?"</p> + +<p>"I do not see how it can be reconciled. In the first +sketch (<a href="#illus-043">Fig. 2</a>), note the shape of the continent of +Atlantis. Now, in the next sketch (<a href="#illus-046">Fig. 3</a>), I have +brought the two continents close up to each other. +The outlines appear similar, and it would be difficult +to make them fit together, if Atlantis should be placed +there, or left in that space, after the breaking apart."</p> + +<p>The discussion was closed for the night and arrangements +made for sleep and sentry duty.</p> + +<p>Frequently during the night the beating of the +singular drums was heard. After the entertainment +of the evening both Muro and Uraso undertook some +scouting on their own account. The boys were awake +early, and then learned of their expeditions.</p> + +<p>Three miles north of the rocky point the main village +was located. They had crept forward cautiously +until close enough to learn that there must be +fully five hundred inhabitants. But what was more +surprising still, was the evidence they obtained that +the tribes believed in the Hoodoos and the witch doctors.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_45" id="p_45" href="#p_45">p. 45</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 357px;"> +<a id="illus-046" name="illus-046"></a> +<a href="#p_44"> +<img src="images/illus-046-fig3.png" width="357" height="559" +alt="Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres" title="Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 3. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Severed</span> <span class="u">Hemispheres</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>The boys were jubilant at the information, and +John was full of smiles as he imparted the +informa<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_46" id="p_46" href="#p_46">p. 46</a></span>tion. +The difficulty was to get into communication +with the natives, as their efforts of the preceding day +did not offer much encouragement in that direction.</p> + +<p>The fact that the people on the island observed peculiar +rites was evidence to John that they must be +steeped in the superstitions that are a necessary part +of the craft of the witch doctors, and to the boys, +as well as to Uraso and Muro, the opportunity for +John to match his intelligence with the crafty Krishnos, +was awaited with interest.</p> + +<p>It was shown on Wonder Island, that while the +people had the most implicit confidence in their medicine +men, they were the first to cause their overthrow +when it was shown that they maintained their superiority +through deceit.</p> + +<p>Before nine o'clock the drums began to beat. +They were plainly heard, as there was a slight breeze +from that direction. John selected fifteen of the +warriors, and accompanied by the boys, and Muro +and Uraso, started for the village.</p> + +<p>"You are to remain here until you get word from +us. If you should hear heavy firing it will be the signal +for you to come on without delay. In such a case +approach cautiously, and rush them, so as to reach us. +We do not want to cause the loss of a single life +among them, except as a last resort to save our own. +Otherwise you are not to leave the cove. One must +be sent to the height beyond, to keep a watch for the +<i>Pioneer</i>.</p> + +<p>"If the vessel is sighted send a runner to the shore, +and try to get into communication with it, so they +may know where we are.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_47" id="p_47" href="#p_47">p. 47</a></span></p> + +<p>"As soon as Tarra returns, send him forward to us +without delay. He should be back before noon to-day." +John was thus precise to deliver the instructions, +because he did not know what their reception +was likely to be at the village.</p> + +<p>As stated, his prime object was to prevent the sacrifice +of captives, if such there should be, or to put +off the rites which he knew would take place that day +and the next.</p> + +<p>They marched down the hill, taking all precautions +on the way, but they met no opposition. Beyond +them was a well wooded plain, and at intervals they +could see, in the distance, detached huts, and in many +places evidences of crude cultivation of the soil.</p> + +<p>The huts were unoccupied, but it was evident from +their appearance that they had been used up to that +very day.</p> + +<p>"I cannot understand why no people are living +here," remarked George.</p> + +<p>"They have gone to the village to attend the sacred +rites," responded Uraso.</p> + +<p>They were now less than a mile from the village, +which could be seen in the distance through the trees. +Something unusual was taking place to their left, and +more than a mile away. Uraso agreed to go in that +direction, and gain the slight elevation, which might +afford him an opportunity to discover the cause of the +excitement.</p> + +<p>There was considerable shouting, and then the +beating of the drums, which they had not heard since +the early morning. Uraso was gone not to exceed +a half hour.</p> + +<p>"They are having something unusual in that quar<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_48" id="p_48" href="#p_48">p. 48</a></span>ter. +A number of natives have just come in, and a +hundred, or more, from the village met the visitors. +I cannot account for the demonstration," observed +one of the boys.</p> + +<p>"It is quite likely," suggested John, "that +some other tribe has come in to attend the ceremonies."</p> + +<p>"I do not think so, because the visitors belong to +the same people who live in the village."</p> + +<p>John was determined to go on, and they proceeded, +reaching the outlying portion of the village, just as +the visitors, and those from the village were entering +it from the other angle.</p> + +<p>"They have a prisoner there," said Muro. "I am +sure that man in the first group is being conducted +to the village."</p> + +<p>"Unquestionably, Muro is correct. It is plain +that a party of the villagers have captured the man, +and the excitement we heard was caused by that +fact." And John began to speculate on the probability +of the island containing more than the one +tribe.</p> + +<p>"That man is a native, I am sure," was Uraso's +observation.</p> + +<p>"That looks like Tarra," said George, in excitement.</p> + +<p>This announcement had an electrical effect on +those present. If such should prove to be the case, +what likelihood was there that he had delivered the +message at the landing? Was he captured going, +or coming.</p> + +<p>"It looks to me as though he was captured this +morning," observed Harry, "because if he had been<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_49" id="p_49" href="#p_49">p. 49</a></span> +taken last night, on his way over, they would not +wait until to-day to bring him in."</p> + +<p>This looked like a reasonable supposition; but +they must first make sure that it was Tarra.</p> + +<p>"Forward march!" said John.</p> + +<p>But before they had time to go far the whole town +seemed to be alive. From every part of the village +men were running, and forming in the open space +next the first row of huts.</p> + +<p>It was a most curious proceeding that the boys +now witnessed. In the center of the warriors was a +large man, with a curious garb. On each side of +him were noticed men with dissimilar clothing, but +bedecked with every sort of device, the peculiarities +of which could not be distinguished, owing to the +distance.</p> + +<p>"That large man in the middle, is the Chief, and +those about him are the witch doctors. The Chief +has brought the witch doctors so as to terrify and destroy +us," and John laughed as he remembered some +of the wiles of that class on Wonder Island.</p> + +<p>To the beating of the drums, the Chief marched +forward, his men following, and closing in on his +sides to afford him protection. John motioned +Uraso and Muro to step forward, and they advanced +twenty feet beyond the warriors, and awaited the +Chief.</p> + +<p>The latter stopped when within hailing distance, +and John held up a hand. Uraso then addressed the +Chief, telling him that they came as friends, and +not as enemies, and desired to be present at the ceremonies +about to take place.</p> + +<p>He also recited that they came from a neighboring<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_50" id="p_50" href="#p_50">p. 50</a></span> +island, where they had a wonderful village, where all +the people were happy, and they now wanted to show, +their friendship by offering presents.</p> + +<p>The Chief was silent, and then said: "Why did +you kill my people?"</p> + +<p>"We only defended ourselves. Your warriors +were the ones who attacked us. We could have +killed all of your warriors if we had been enemies."</p> + +<p>"You speak lies," answered the Chief. "Why +did you take my warrior?"</p> + +<p>"Because he was wounded and we are making him +well, and will then return him to you so he can tell +you that what we say is true."</p> + +<p>"You are again speaking lies," he retorted. Notwithstanding +the manner in which Uraso had steeled +himself, he was visibly affected by the blunt manner +in which the savage accused him, but he was judicious +enough not to appear disturbed.</p> + +<p>"Ask him," said John, "what he wants us to do +to prove that we are friends, and not enemies."</p> + +<p>The Chief, at this question, drew himself up +proudly, and answered: "You are on my dominion, +and you have no right to ask any favor from me. +You must deliver yourself up as prisoners, and we +shall then deal with you as we see fit."</p> + +<p>"In what way will you deal with us? Have we +committed a wrong? Do you intend to punish us?"</p> + +<p>"You had no right to come here. Every one who +does so without my permission, must die."</p> + +<p>"Then you expect us to surrender so you may kill +us?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Then our Chief tells you that he has a right to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_51" id="p_51" href="#p_51">p. 51</a></span> +come here, and that you have no right to prevent it, +and that if you try to kill us we will have the Great +Spirit visit you the same as he visited your warriors +the other day," said Uraso.</p> + +<p>The Chief was astounded at the audacity of the +visitors. He could not understand the presumption +of Uraso, and the defiant attitude of the little group +behind him.</p> + +<p>"Then I command the Korinos to destroy you!" +he shouted.</p> + +<p>Muro turned to the boys, and smiled as he said: +"Do you know what he means? He calls them Korinos. +On Wonder Island they are Krishnos. That +seems pretty close to the same thing."</p> + +<p>Uraso held up a hand, as he said: "I have a +Korino here (pointing to John), and he will destroy +your Korinos."</p> + +<p>The witch doctors then ranged themselves in front +of the Chief, and the latter said: "They will sacrifice +your friend who came to us to-day."</p> + +<p>To the astonishment of all, Tarra was led forward, +and ordered to kneel down. Then a great +burly man, clothed in the garb so common to the +sorceress among savage tribes, followed him with a +huge knotted club.</p> + +<p>"Tell him that if he raises the club I will order the +Korino to die."</p> + +<p>This was imparted, but it made no difference to +the executioner. He stepped forward, and slowly +raised the club, but before it had reached its highest +point, a revolver in the hands of John spoke, and +the savage dropped the club, and slowly sank to the +earth.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_52" id="p_52" href="#p_52">p. 52</a></span></p> + +<p>It would be impossible to describe the consternation +that showed itself at this catastrophe.</p> + +<p>"Come here, Tarra," cried John.</p> + +<p>Tarra leaped to his feet, and with a few bounds +was at Uraso's side, while Harry jumped forward +and cut the thongs that bound his hands.</p> + +<p>The Chief was bewildered, no less than those +around him. No effort was made to prevent Tarra +from escaping. The other Korinos did not even go +forward to the relief of their slain comrade. He lay +there motionless.</p> + +<p>"I am sorry," said John. "I must have made a +miscalculation, but I am afraid he is dead."</p> + +<p>Then one of the Korinos moved toward the fallen +man. "Stop!" cried John. "It will be death for +any one to touch him now!"</p> + +<p>Uraso hurriedly informed the Chief of this new +piece of information, which, in reality, caused more +terror than the shot itself. What species of sorcery +was this that they dared not even touch the victim +who disobeyed the white Korino?</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_53" id="p_53" href="#p_53">p. 53</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>"Did</span> you deliver the message at the landing +place?" asked George, after Tarra was freed.</p> + +<p>"No; they captured me late last night. I tried for +hours to get through, but they were within a mile of +the landing," answered Tarra.</p> + +<p>"But where have you been all this time?"</p> + +<p>"They took me north to another village."</p> + +<p>But more interesting things were now happening. +The witch doctor who was about to go to his fallen +companion, hesitated. He turned to the Chief. +The latter merely stretched out his hand, and with +an impatient gesture appeared to order him on.</p> + +<p>"I warn you!" said Uraso. "It will be death to +touch him."</p> + +<p>If there is one thing, more than another, that is +liable to add terror to a low order of human beings, +it is noise. It may be said that the most intelligent +are not entirely devoid of the feeling of fear at inexplainable +noises.</p> + +<p>As an example, take the sensations produced by +thunder and lightning, one which affects the ear, and +the other the eye. During a thunderstorm, the feeling +of fear becomes acute only when the roar is +heard.</p> + +<p>In this case we know what it is that produces the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_54" id="p_54" href="#p_54">p. 54</a></span> +reverberations; but even under those circumstances +many people are seriously affected by it. A terrific +explosion, of which we do not know the cause, is +often the source of great terror.</p> + +<p>This is particularly true with all savage people. +The drums referred to, evidence this particular +feeling of awe, and the louder and more violent, the +more intense is it to the untutored mind. It is with +this idea in their minds that they exercise the bad +spirits by driving them away by making great noises, +a practice true of most savage tribes.</p> + +<p>When John returned to Wonder Island from the +United States he had taken with him several of the +well-known Silencers, which, when attached to the +muzzle of a gun, will so deaden the sound that no explosion +is heard.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;"> +<a id="illus-055" name="illus-055"></a> +<a href="#p_54"> +<img src="images/illus-055-fig4.png" width="361" height="111" +alt="Fig. 4. Silencer: Convolute Blades" title="Fig. 4. Silencer: Convolute Blades" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 4. <span class="u">Silencer</span>: <span class="u">Convolute</span> <span class="u">Blades</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>For general use, John knew that the unmuffled +gun would be far more effective than those equipped +with the new invention. Smokeless powder was also +used in the guns which John and his company carried. +The absence of smoke thus centers the mind +of the native on the sound alone, and he sees the +effect on the victim.</p> + +<p>To the savage the sound and the effect of the shot +produce the sensation that there is something more +than human in the discharge. It is hard for them<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_55" id="p_55" href="#p_55">p. 55</a></span> +to form an idea of the connection between the report +and the mission of the bullet. It is some monster +which speaks in a loud voice.</p> + +<p>But it was more than that to the islanders when +they saw the witch doctor fall. There was a white +Korino who spoke with a voice of thunder. They +were not aware that he held something in his hand +like a weapon, and the noise and the result of that +noise stunned them.</p> + +<p>John also carried a revolver with one of the +silencers. When the Korino turned to the Chief, +and the latter, determined not to be swayed by the +power of the white man, there was but one thing for +him to do. He must obey. He knew that if he +shrunk from the task it would be a confession that +his power was gone.</p> + +<p>The man approached the prostrate form. "Stop!" +again cried Uraso. "The white Korino will not +again speak, but if he touches the body you will +die!"</p> + +<p>He stood there for a moment, irresolute, and then +slowly stooped down, and with hesitation at every +motion, finally touched the figure. In the meantime +John had leveled the revolver with the silencer, and +as the man again rose to an erect position, and +glanced at John defiantly, he quickly threw up his +hands and fell forward across his former companion +with a shot through his arm, as it was not John's +intention to kill him if it could by any possibility be +avoided.</p> + +<p>The white Korino had not spoken, as Uraso predicted, +but the results were the same. The savages +who were lined up on both sides of the Chief, began<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_56" id="p_56" href="#p_56">p. 56</a></span> +to waver. They were moving to the rear. The +Korinos around the Chief, finally broke and fled, +and when the people saw this evidence of fear on the +part of their Wise Men, they could not be restrained.</p> + +<p>The Chief followed them hurriedly. "Now, +quickly, boys, fire two rounds. No; not at the natives, +but up in the air."</p> + +<p>The boys could not understand what John could +mean by such an order, but they did not have an +opportunity to ask the reason for it.</p> + +<p>After the volleys John turned to Muro and Uraso, +and remarked: "As soon as the men come up you +and Muro must contrive in some way to find out the +direction that the Korinos have taken."</p> + +<p>They now saw the object of the volleys. It would +bring up those of their party who had remained at +the rocky cove. The watch for the Korinos was +equally plain. The experience on Wonder Island +showed that the witch doctors inhabited the caves.</p> + +<p>In the excitement they had entirely forgotten this +part of their enterprise. They thought of the treasure. +John had the treasure of the records in his +mind. The hills all about; the limestone formations +of the elevations were ample assurance to his mind +that some caverns would be found; and while they +might, eventually, be able to locate the entrances, it +would be better to find out where they were by watching +and charting the direction they took on their way +to the dark places where they hoped to rest in fancied +security.</p> + +<p>Within fifteen minutes their rear guard came into +sight, rushing over the hills, all expectant to find an +enemy in their front. Great was their surprise to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_57" id="p_57" href="#p_57">p. 57</a></span> +see the village beyond, and John and his party bending +over the two bodies, one of them moving and the +other inert. Apparently, he and his force were unconcerned, +although many savages were in the village, +and in plain sight.</p> + +<p>An examination of the fallen men made John +happy, because he feared that his aim had been untrue. +Both had been severely wounded, and when +an hour afterwards both men were able to move, +thanks to the knowledge and care of John, they were +carried into the village.</p> + +<p>Before this was done, however, John ordered the +force to march boldly into the village. On the approach +of the party the Chief and his followers, together +with the women and children, hurriedly fled +to the north.</p> + +<p>Among the huts were found a dozen or more sick +and injured men and women, and a number of old +people who were unable to be carried away. John +went to each, and after carefully examining them, +administered medicine.</p> + +<p>In one place they found two warriors, who had +been wounded in the battle four days previously. +These were given special attention, the villagers +meanwhile looking on the proceeding with a feeling +of awe, and wonder. They could not comprehend +the care and treatment which was being given them.</p> + +<p>John's companions were most eager to render aid, +and spoke to the patients freely, telling them that +they were friends, and not enemies. During this investigation +into every corner of the village, George +and Harry were the most active. They found many +amusing things, but the care of the sick and the in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_58" id="p_58" href="#p_58">p. 58</a></span>firm +was the first duty, and they had many willing +helpers.</p> + +<p>While thus engaged they reached a long, low +thatched enclosure, so entirely different from the +huts scattered about. There was no visible opening. +They walked around the enclosure with more +and more curiosity. Some of their companions from +Wonder Island then drew near.</p> + +<p>"We have found it!" cried one of them.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"This is the place where they keep the captives."</p> + +<p>"But how can we get into it?" asked George, then +adding, "Get one of the hatchets, quickly."</p> + +<p>Several men ran back and opened the packages +containing their equipment, and others followed to +see the prisoners. Uraso was one of the first to +come up, and he was soon followed by John, all in +excitement over the news. George was the first one +to get a hatchet. He soon chopped a way through, +and Uraso was the first to crawl into the enclosure, +followed by George.</p> + +<p>The latter staggered back, as he saw the scene +before him. The enclosure was fully fifteen feet +high, and occupied a space, probably, twenty feet +each way. It was constructed of a species of bamboo, +exceedingly hard, two rows of these paling being +driven into the ground close together, so that it was +impossible to see through the stockade at any point.</p> + +<p>Within there was absolutely nothing but the bare +ground, and a mass of indescribable filth, as may +be imagined. Here, lying on the earth, were five +men, with little or no clothing, covered with dirt +and vermin. Two of them were in fairly good con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_59" id="p_59" href="#p_59">p. 59</a></span>dition, +an evidence that they had not long been prisoners.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 379px;"> +<a id="illus-060" name="illus-060"></a> +<a href="#p_52"> +<img src="images/illus-060.png" width="379" height="569" +alt="'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'" +title="'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'" /> +</a> +<span class="caption">"<i>'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_52">See p. 52</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p>The other three were emaciated, and what surprised +the boys most was the long, matted and +tangled beard of one of the three. The moment John +saw that form he turned to the boys and fairly +shrieked: "This is a white man. Cut down that +fence, so the men can be taken out, and the moment +they are removed set fire to this place."</p> + +<p>The boys could not understand John's vehement +expression.</p> + +<p>"Shall we burn the village?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Oh, no! Burn only this enclosure, and don't let +a vestige of it remain."</p> + +<p>His orders were quickly carried out. Meanwhile, +not a quarter of a mile away, were the Chief and the +owners of the village, who, upon seeing the smoke and +the flames, appeared to be frantic. No doubt they +regarded it as a sign that the village was doomed, +but they were soon reassured by the time the stockade +was finally consumed, and the few watchers reported +to the Chief that nothing but the prison had been destroyed.</p> + +<p>"We have destroyed the Bastille," remarked John, +"and must now take care of the prisoners." They +found that it was indeed a white man who had been +rescued. He was frightfully emaciated, and too +weak to talk.</p> + +<p>This was also the condition of the two natives. +The other two were soon restored, after receiving +nourishment, and were ready to tell their story. +They had been taken two weeks previously in a battle +with the tribe to the north.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_60" id="p_60" href="#p_60">p. 60</a></span></p> + +<p>Through these men they learned that there were +only two tribes on the island, and that this was by +far the largest, in point of numbers. There had +been continual war between the two people, and the +only thing which saved his tribe from extermination +was the fact that they lived in the mountain regions, +and were thus protected.</p> + +<p>This information was very welcome to John and +the boys. The mountains seemed to have a fascination +for them,—and then, the caves, how could they +forget them now?</p> + +<p>For three hours the Chief and his people waited +in the distance. John did not pay any attention to +them, apparently. Shortly thereafter two of his +men came in, dragging one of the former patients.</p> + +<p>"We saw him trying to steal away," said one of +the men.</p> + +<p>"Was he going toward his people?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Then let him go, by all means, and tell him that +we would be glad to have the Chief and his people +return."</p> + +<p>The poor fellow was astonished to learn that he +was free. He was as much surprised at this as at +the care which they had bestowed to cure him. He +passed through the village, looking about him with +furtive glances, but, at the command of John, no one +paid any attention to him.</p> + +<p>When he reached the Chief there was a long consultation, +and it was evident that a momentous +change was taking place. The Chief could be seen +constantly glancing toward the village, and soon the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_61" id="p_61" href="#p_61">p. 61</a></span> +self-imposed messenger returned and approached +John.</p> + +<p>"The Chief is willing to see you, and will come to +you, if you wish it." This was imparted to John, +and the latter responded:</p> + +<p>"I will go with you."</p> + +<p>He called the two chiefs Muro and Uraso, and the +boys, and told them he would go with the messenger +to the Chief, alone, and that they should have no +fear for him.</p> + +<p>Accompanied by the messenger, John walked +boldly to the Chief, and going up, pressed his nose +against him, in token of eternal friendship, and then +motioned him to go back to the village.</p> + +<p>The Chief was astounded, first, at the bravery of +John in thus coming to him, and in then vowing eternal +friendship.</p> + +<p>There is something very peculiar in the characteristics +of savages which forbids them from violating +a peace pledge, or a treaty of friendship when entered +into with the rites that they acknowledge. The +most formal of these rites, is that of rubbing noses +together.</p> + +<p>How the custom originated, is not known. It is +something like the kiss, in so far as it is a visible +token of either love, friendship, or esteem. It is +seldom that the savage violates the pledge which is +thus given. John knew this, and felt assured the +great Chief would respect it.</p> + +<p>When the latter came into the village, the first +sight that met his eyes, was the demolished stockade. +He looked at it for a moment, in silence. Then some<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_62" id="p_62" href="#p_62">p. 62</a></span> +of the old men came forward, and began to tell him +the wondrous tales of kindness.</p> + +<p>The Chief went to his own home, and when he saw +that everything was untouched, and that none of the +people was harmed, he could not understand the actions +of the White Chief, and so expressed his astonishment +to Uraso and Muro. When he was told +that the latter were Chiefs of two tribes on Wonder +Island, he was still more surprised.</p> + +<p>"Do you not fight each other?" he asked.</p> + +<p>Uraso smiled, as he answered: "Why should +we fight? There is no pleasure in killing, or in causing +suffering. We used to think about those things +as you do."</p> + +<p>"What made you think otherwise?"</p> + +<p>"The White Chief told us it was wrong, and we +have found that his words were true."</p> + +<p>"Where is this place where your tribe may be +found?"</p> + +<p>"It is on the other side of the sea, over there," +answered Uraso, pointing to the west.</p> + +<p>"Will it take long to get there?"</p> + +<p>"It takes only one sun, and the White Chief would +be so happy to take you there and show you the great +village, and to see the people and the Chiefs who +live together in happiness, and to learn from the +people themselves how they enjoy their homes, and +make the many curious things that the White Chief +has brought over for you."</p> + +<p>The Chief looked about him, and finally said: "I +want to see the White Chief."</p> + +<p>John had purposely refrained from going to the +Chief's home, but Uraso accompanied him at John's<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_63" id="p_63" href="#p_63">p. 63</a></span> +request, because he was the more diplomatic, and +wielded a stronger influence than Muro, owing to his +remarkable personality.</p> + +<p>John was glad of the opportunity, and the boys, +as usual, were also present. The Chief's eyes followed +the two boys, as they entered. He smiled at +them, as John came up and greeted him.</p> + +<p>Uraso told John what they had talked about, and +that the Chief was interested in his story of Wonder +Island.</p> + +<p>"Our Great Chief will welcome you to Wonder Island," +said John.</p> + +<p>The Chief looked at John for a moment, and then +his eyes wandered to Uraso, as he answered: "Is +there still a greater Chief? Is there a man more +powerful than this Chief?"</p> + +<p>Uraso laughed, as did John. "Tell him," said +John, "that our Chief is powerful, because he is +wise."</p> + +<p>He did not seem to understand this, and asked for +more information. Uraso told him that the white +man did not regard the strong man as the greatest, +but that the wisest man was always the Chief.</p> + +<p>Here was certainly a new philosophy. "But," he +inquired, "then how can he rule his people, if he is +not strong?"</p> + +<p>"The people willingly submit to his will because +they know what he says is best for them."</p> + +<p>"But does not the Chief sometimes tell them lies, +and does he not often deceive them?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but when they do so then the people choose +another Chief in his place."</p> + +<p>"And after they have killed the first Chief, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_64" id="p_64" href="#p_64">p. 64</a></span> +have taken another, and he lies, do they also kill +him?"</p> + +<p>"No; they do not kill the Chiefs, but they only put +others in their places."</p> + +<p>"Then they are not wise Chiefs?"</p> + +<p>"No; they are wise only when they do what is +right."</p> + +<p>"Do what is right! What do you mean by that? +How can the Chief do anything but right?"</p> + +<p>"Do you think," asked Uraso, "that the Chief has +a right to lie or deceive?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, he can do that, but not his people. It is +wrong for them to do so."</p> + +<p>"But the white man believes that it is just as +wrong for the Chief to lie and to deceive, as for the +people to do so."</p> + +<p>The Chief was silent for a long time, and John +purposely permitted him to reflect on the new dispensation. +While thus musing on the new theory, a +woman carrying a child appeared at the door. John +saw her, and, stepping out, took the child from her +arms. She permitted it, and when the Chief appeared +she fell down and explained that the White +Chief had been very kind to her.</p> + +<p>John took some medicine from a small vial, and +administered it, the Chief meanwhile looking on in +astonishment. Here was a great White Chief, looking +out for the comfort of one of the poorest of his +people.</p> + +<p>Uraso knew his thoughts. This woman was the +poorest and the lowest in the tribe, and John, without +stopping to make any inquiries as to her condition, +or position in life, had aided her and her old mother.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_65" id="p_65" href="#p_65">p. 65</a></span></p> + +<p>Evidently the new doctrine was something so extraordinary, +that it was worth investigating. Uraso +saw the embarrassment in the mind of the Chief, and +after speaking a few words, withdrew.</p> + +<p>As they left the Chief's quarters the boys roamed +through the village. The stories of the sufferers +which John had aided, the scrupulous care with +which the men guarded the homes of the villagers +while they were absent, had a most telling effect.</p> + +<p>The warriors from Wonder Island mingled with +the villagers. It was singular that there was not +an expression of hatred. They fraternized, and related +stories of Wonder Island, and the people told +them about their own island.</p> + +<p>The boys met many of their own ages, and to them +they showed the revolvers, and the marine glasses, +and then astounded them by exhibiting the watches +which they carried.</p> + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_66" id="p_66" href="#p_66">p. 66</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>RETURN OF THE NATIVES</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>Several</span> of the packages left at the landing place, +contained numerous trinkets, and articles of personal +adornment, such as the natives adored. Brightly-colored +fabrics, made at the factory on Wonder Island +were also among the many articles, which had +been intended to be used as presents.</p> + +<p>John was gratified to learn, an hour or two after +the Chief returned, that the latter had given orders +to the villagers to prepare a feast for the visitors.</p> + +<p>"But where are the Korinos?" asked George.</p> + +<p>True, they had disappeared.</p> + +<p>"Let us see John about that," responded Harry.</p> + +<p>They had some time in finding him, but later on +learned that he was attending to the wounded, and +caring for the late prisoners.</p> + +<p>"It would not be wise to speak to the Chief about +that now," responded John. "The leaven is working +well in his mind. Besides, I fear that he will +wreak vengeance on them, and we must prevent him +from killing them."</p> + +<p>As the boys were leaving John they saw fifty of the +warriors leave the Chief's home, marching out of the +village to the east. Muro entered the hut where +John was staying, and announced that the Chief +wished to see him.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_67" id="p_67" href="#p_67">p. 67</a></span></p> + +<p>John continued with his work, after informing +Muro that he would soon visit the Chief. The boys +later saw John and Muro on their way to the "Palace," +as Harry called the royal residence, and begged +John's permission to accompany them.</p> + +<p>The Chief received them with special marks of attention, +and John thanked him for the invitation.</p> + +<p>"This is the day which the Wise Men have appointed +for the sacrifices, and the people are preparing +the feast, in accordance with our custom. It +is my wish that you shall be my guests, and take part +in our ceremonies," remarked the Chief.</p> + +<p>Muro, in behalf of John, thanked him for the invitation, +and assured him that they would gladly +join in the rites. Then, he continued: "I wish to +inform you that we left at the seashore, on the other +side of the island, some gifts which I am desirous +of presenting to you. If you will order some of your +men to accompany my guides they will bring them +back."</p> + +<p>The Chief's eyes lighted up with pleasure. Immediately, +a detail of men were designated, and a +half dozen of John's warriors, under the leadership +of Muro, were requested to proceed to the landing.</p> + +<p>The people saw the company depart with the greatest +wonder and curiosity. Muro was instructed to +leave a message at the landing, and return with the +packages as soon as possible. They reached the +landing place within two hours, and were rejoiced +to see the <i>Pioneer</i> anchored not far from the shore.</p> + +<p>Stut was recognized at once, but Sutoto had remained +at Wonder Island. The packages were taken +to the <i>Pioneer</i>, and Muro informed Stut that they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_68" id="p_68" href="#p_68">p. 68</a></span> +would sail around the island and land near the village. +The men from the village were awe stricken +at the sight of the vessel, and it was difficult to get +their consent to embarking but were soon persuaded, +when presented with some of the gifts, which Muro +knew would be acceptable.</p> + +<hr class='sorta' /> + +<p>An hour after the last interview in the Chief's +home, the boys saw the warriors, who had formerly +left the Chief's home, marching down the street of +the village, and guarding the Korinos who had +formed part of the Chief's escort earlier in the day.</p> + +<p>They were quite different now in demeanor, and +the boys thought they looked crestfallen. They were +ushered into the Chief's presence without any ceremony.</p> + +<p>They stood there like criminals, and felt that their +doom was sealed. "I have sent for you," he said, +"because this is the day you have selected for the +ceremonies. Where are the prisoners to be sacrificed?"</p> + +<p>They were silent. The Chief continued: "You +have told us that the Great Spirit asks for the sacrifices +each year when the sun is leaving us, and +when the moon is hiding behind the vail. Bring the +captives so they may be offered up."</p> + +<p>Instantly the Korinos brightened up, and muttered +a few words. The Chief gave an order, and they +were marched out of the building. Out of curiosity, +the boys followed. Their steps were directed to the +stockade where the prisoners had been confined.</p> + +<p>To their dismay they saw only the ashes, and were +staggered at the sight. They stood there with won<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_69" id="p_69" href="#p_69">p. 69</a></span>dering +eyes. The boys could see that this was a condition +wholly unexpected by them, and it must be +said that there was pity in the hearts of Harry and +George, as the leader gave the order for them to return +to the "Palace."</p> + +<p>As they entered John and the Chief were engaged +in an animated conversation, and when the latter +saw the Korinos, he stood up and asked for the victims.</p> + +<p>"They are not there!" was the only response.</p> + +<p>The Chief, not affecting to believe, told them that +they were lying to him. They fell to their knees, +but were mute.</p> + +<p>"But the Great Spirit must not be deceived. +Great evil will fall upon us if he is not appeased. +If you cannot find the victims I will do so."</p> + +<p>The Chief's voice was terrible in its anger. Outside +of their dark homes the Korinos were subject +to the Chief's will. Within the caves they knew no +fear. The boys looked at Uraso and John. A slight +smile could be seen on Uraso's face, as he returned +the gaze of the boys; but John's face was immobile, +and did not in the least appear to portray any concern.</p> + +<p>"It is my order that you shall be the victims, and +must be offered up as the sacrifices to prevent the +anger of the Great Spirit."</p> + +<p>This doom was pronounced in a voice so full of +anger that its significance was instantly divined by +the boys, although they could not understand all of +the words which he uttered.</p> + +<p>They were instantly seized and bound, and being +now in a helpless condition, were carried out of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_70" id="p_70" href="#p_70">p. 70</a></span> +building, and, with the most brutal force conveyed +by the guard to a hut not far from the Palace, and +literally thrust into the small opening which formed +the entrance.</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose they will kill them?" asked +Harry, as he moved to the side of Uraso.</p> + +<p>"I think the Chief means what he says," and +Uraso gave a little smile that somewhat assured +them.</p> + +<p>"No; I don't think John will let the Chief kill +them," responded George.</p> + +<p>After the removal of the Korinos John asked +whether it would be possible to defer the ceremonies +until the following day, for the reason that he desired +to distribute the gifts which the men were +bringing from the landing.</p> + +<p>"If the White Chief so desires it shall be done."</p> + +<p>John manifested his pleasure at the consent thus +obtained.</p> + +<p>George and Harry now wandered into every part +of the village. For the first time they noticed that +it was located at the western edge of a beautiful +grove, thickly wooded, with tall trees.</p> + +<p>Through this they walked, and before they +emerged were delighted at the sight of the great +ocean beyond. "I wonder if John knows we are so +near?"</p> + +<p>They ran to the beach, delighted to have an opportunity +for a bath, but were surprised to see many +along the shore with small bags.</p> + +<p>"They are searching for something," remarked +Harry. "I wonder what it can be?"</p> + +<p>"Possibly clams. Don't you remember the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_71" id="p_71" href="#p_71">p. 71</a></span> +week when we lived on clams, after we reached Wonder +Island? What delightful days we had; and how +afraid we were of every noise, and used to start up at +every new sound."</p> + +<p>"And wasn't it a joy to make the new things, and +see every day bring new wonders to us after we +moved to the Cataract?"</p> + +<p>"I have a love for that old home. We were so +happy there. I know I am not happier now when +we own all the treasures of the caves, than when we +were building the water wheel, and the little shop, +and tending the yaks," answered George, as he gazed +across the sea, and thought of the glorious times and +of their wonderful adventures.</p> + +<p>When they saw the streams of people coming from +the shore they recalled that the people were preparing +for the feast. It was remarkable that clams +were an article of food with these people when those +on the island they had just left, despised all fish +and sea food.</p> + +<p>They wandered along the beach, fully a mile south +of the village, and quite out of reach of the people, +and were soon in the mild surf. After a half hour +of this enjoyment they dressed, and ascended a slight +elevation from which could be seen the character of +the land along the sea.</p> + +<p>To the north and south of their position the land +was much higher, the northern portion having the +appearance of very high hills, if not mountains.</p> + +<p>"Do you think John was thinking about the caves +when the guards brought in the Korinos?" remarked +George, as they were descending the ridge.</p> + +<p>"I thought of it," answered Harry. "But I<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_72" id="p_72" href="#p_72">p. 72</a></span> +learned from Muro that he knew where they made +their homes!"</p> + +<p>"Then he must have watched them, as John suggested!"</p> + +<p>"No; one of the men told him just before he left."</p> + +<p>"What did he say?"</p> + +<p>"That they should follow the trail to the north of +the grove until they reached the sea."</p> + +<p>"Then Muro must know that the sea is near?"</p> + +<p>"I think he does."</p> + +<p>During the descent from the hill the ocean was +visible directly to the east. Both, at the same instant, +caught sight of a sail. They gasped in surprise, +as they gazed at the unusual spectacle.</p> + +<p>"I would like to know who that can be," queried +Harry. "Let us tell John and then get something +so we can signal it."</p> + +<p>They rushed down the hill, and ran hurriedly +through the streets of the village, to the surprise +of the inhabitants. First going to the Chief's house, +without finding him, they went to the improvised +hospital where the wounded Korinos were being +cared for.</p> + +<p>There John was found, together with Uraso and +the Chief. "We have seen a sail," shouted George. +"We want something to use as a signal." John +bounded up, and Uraso rushed out and soon fished +out a white cloth, and ran down through the grove +after the boys.</p> + +<p>Three hundred feet to the right was a slight elevation, +which the boys had noticed, and as it was devoid +of trees offered the most available place for the +signal flag. They scurried around for some pole<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_73" id="p_73" href="#p_73">p. 73</a></span> +which would answer, and to this the white cloth was +quickly attached.</p> + +<p>John was the last to reach the signaling point. +He was laughing immoderately, as he noticed the +frantic signaling. "Where are your field glasses, +George?"</p> + +<p>"They are in the village. I forgot about them."</p> + +<p>"If you had used them you would not be surprised +at the visitor."</p> + +<p>The boys stopped signaling for a moment, and +then looked at the ship.</p> + +<p>"It isn't possible that is the <i>Pioneer</i>?"</p> + +<p>"Look again, for yourself; don't you know your +own work?"</p> + +<p>The ship had seen the signal, and now turned. +Then they recognized the grand little vessel, that +was almost a part of themselves, for they had worked +many months to complete her, and had tried to put +good luck and best wishes into every plank and spar +and sail.</p> + +<p>The Chief, too, was coming. The whole village +joined to welcome the ship, for when Uraso told the +Chief that their own ship was coming, he could not +resist the temptation to witness the arrival.</p> + +<p>Was it possible that Muro reached the landing +place before the ship left? John thought so, but the +boys doubted it. Muro left before noon, and it was +now past five in the evening.</p> + +<p>As the vessel neared the shore the people lined up +and the boys crowded close to the shore. They were +the first to recognize Muro, to their great delight. +He waved his hand to them, and Stut was by his +side.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_74" id="p_74" href="#p_74">p. 74</a></span></p> + +<p>"Good old Stut!" shouted George. "Where is +Sutoto?"</p> + +<p>"In Wonder Island!" was the response.</p> + +<p>They were disappointed at this, but there was too +much for them to think about, as the anchor was being +swung, and as soon as it dropped, a boat was lowered +from each side, and the men began to descend +from the short ladder, while the village people +watched the proceeding with silent wonderment.</p> + +<p>Muro was the first to touch the shore, and then +came the villagers who were on the mission with +Muro. They were the heroes to their friends. They +knew their duty to their Chief, however, and the latter +had a most animated conversation with them, and +particularly so after he had noticed the array of +trinkets which Muro had bestowed on them.</p> + +<p>While this was going on the boats returned and +bundles and packages were brought out of the ship +and deposited in the boats. After they had been +taken from the boats, John said: "With your permission +I will take these things to your house."</p> + +<p>The Chief assented, and on his orders the men in +the village gathered up the assortment of gifts and +the procession filed along the path to the village.</p> + +<p>The feast that evening reminded them of the welcome/ +which the Chief Beralsea extended to them the +second night after their arrival at Venture Island. +Besides the clams referred to there was an abundance +of fish, several varieties, besides game and +meats, and the only thing which they seemed to lack, +or which was rather meager in quantity, was fruit.</p> + +<p>Like all natives of these islands, they were experts +at spitting the meats. The most delicious was a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_75" id="p_75" href="#p_75">p. 75</a></span> +species of ground hog, that the boys frequently +caught on Wonder Island. The boys had watched +the method of roasting these animals.</p> + +<p>A strong green tapering stick, about four feet +long was selected, and the bark was peeled off, so as +to give it a smooth surface. The small end of this +was sharpened, and driven through the animal, from +end to end, so that it was held firmly on the stick, +midway between its ends.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;"> +<a id="illus-078" name="illus-078"></a> +<a href="#p_75"> +<img src="images/illus-078-fig5.png" width="366" height="209" +alt="Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast" title="Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 5. <span class="u">Spitting</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Roast</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Two forked posts were then driven into the +ground, about three feet apart, and the stick laid +in the forks. A fire of wood, previously built between +the posts was permitted to accumulate a quantity +of coal, and when a hot fire was thus generated, +one of the natives would continuously rotate the stick, +so that the heat affected all sides evenly, and the +result would be the most tempting roast imaginable. +This is a practice common with savages all over the +world, varying only in the details of the preparations.</p> + +<p>All the vegetables were roasted, in hot coals. In<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_76" id="p_76" href="#p_76">p. 76</a></span> +this respect their custom was different from the practice +followed in Venture Island, for there they knew +how to make stews. Here they knew nothing about +pottery, but like all islanders in the South Seas, the +wrecks would, occasionally cast cooking utensils, like +pots, or pans, ashore, and these highly-prized articles +were sure to be taken by the Chiefs, or by the Krishnos +themselves, where they could get them by stealth.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;"> +<a id="illus-079" name="illus-079"></a> +<a href="#p_77"> +<img src="images/illus-079-fig6.png" width="366" height="225" +alt="Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla" title="Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 6. <span class="u">Arialad</span> <span class="u">Fruit</span>. <span class="u">Sarsaparilla</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Unlike the natives of Wonder Island, they had potatoes, +the wild variety which the boys found the second +day after they were cast ashore. The Taro root, +that vegetable which grows in the greatest abundance +in every section south of the Equator, to the lower +border of the south temperate zone, was the chief +dish, and was also roasted in like manner.</p> + +<p>What surprised them most was a drink that +pleased John, who at once recognized its origin. +They called it Arialad, and George declared it was a +fine quality of Sarsaparilla.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_77" id="p_77" href="#p_77">p. 77</a></span></p> + +<p>"You are correct," said John. "Its real botanical +name is Arialace. It belongs to the same family +as spikenard and ginseng. Very few natives know +of its value. It is both a medicine and a refreshing +drink."</p> + +<p>"If it grows in abundance here it would be a good +thing to gather for export," observed Harry.</p> + +<p>"A boat load of the roots would be worth a fortune," +rejoined John.</p> + +<p>There was the utmost good fellowship among all +present. In accordance with the custom among most +of these people the women did not partake of the +food in the presence of the men. They acted as the +servants in serving the food, but the men prepared +the meal, a sort of well-balanced family arrangement, +as George observed.</p> + +<p>"But who washes the dishes?" asked Harry with a +laugh, in which all joined.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_78" id="p_78" href="#p_78">p. 78</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>The</span> next day was the one appointed for the ceremonies. +The boys were expectant, because during +all their experiences in the islands, this was the first +time they had an opportunity to witness one of these +spectacles.</p> + +<p>It was noticed that no preparations were made for +a morning meal by the natives. All were specially +garbed for the occasion, if the colored decorations +counted for anything in the way of additional clothing.</p> + +<p>They were adept in the art of weaving cloth, +which was made in small sections, and sewn together, +similar to the practice in most of these primitive +countries. They were not altogether devoid of +knowledge pertaining to dyes, the most frequent being +blue, which John soon ascertained came from +some copper deposits.</p> + +<p>The Madder plant was the most common on the +island, and this afforded a red color, the most lasting +of all dyes, and the most generally in use throughout +the civilized world, until the aniline dyes took +its place.</p> + +<p>For black they resorted to the common method +of using carbon which is the stock material in our +own country. This was produced by them from<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_79" id="p_79" href="#p_79">p. 79</a></span> +burnt wood, and not from any of the coal products.</p> + +<p>Their faces were painted a hideous red and blue, +principally in the nature of great zig-zag stripes, and +the exposed parts, of the bodies were of diverse figures, +some of them really artistic. The preparation +of these personal decorations consumed the greater +portion of the night, as the boys afterwards learned.</p> + +<p>When they emerged from their hut in the morning, +and saw the grotesque figures all about the village, +they could hardly repress a smile; but as every one +was smiling and happy, they did not have to make +any pretentions, but smiled and laughed as the men +and women circled about, because they couldn't help +themselves.</p> + +<p>The women were not so gaudily attired as the men. +Their decorations were expended on clothing, as it +was not considered good form to decorate their +bodies.</p> + +<p>All the men carried spears, and many of them were +wicked-looking instruments. What surprised them +was the fact that all the spear-points were now covered +over, or bound up by colored material, forming +a sort of sphere, to which three colored streamers +were attached, one white, one red and the other blue.</p> + +<p>"My, but they are patriotic!" remarked George, as +he saw the design and the streamers.</p> + +<p>John smiled, as he observed them. "But do you +notice that the point of the spear is covered?"</p> + +<p>"I was about to ask the meaning of that," said +Harry.</p> + +<p>"This is the day of feasting and of sacrifices. +The covered point indicates that there is peace; and +that no one can commit an injury. I imagine the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_80" id="p_80" href="#p_80">p. 80</a></span> +points will be uncovered quickly enough the moment +they are ready for the sacrifices."</p> + +<p>"I am more interested in the fact that they use the +American colors. I wish we had one of the flags +here. That idea has just struck me as being the +proper thing." And George danced about at the +scheme.</p> + +<p>Harry was just as much affected now. "Why not +consult Uraso and Muro, and bring over the big flag +from the ship?"</p> + +<p>John laughed at the idea. "A brilliant idea. The +flag will be a big attraction, but I warn you that if +you get it I shall have to insist that you must head +the procession with it."</p> + +<p>"Are we going to have a procession?"</p> + +<p>"I believe that is the first thing on the list."</p> + +<p>"But where is the procession going? Is it the +custom to march along the principal streets and out +along the boulevards?"</p> + +<p>This idea was so laughable to Harry and Uraso +and Muro, that they had a fit of laughter. The two Chiefs +were just like boys, and entered in to the spirit +of the undertaking with a vim that pleased the boys.</p> + +<p>They fairly flew to the landing, and manned the +boat. "We have come for the flag," announced +George, as Stut was looking on the excitable boys.</p> + +<p>"Why not take both of them?" responded Stut.</p> + +<p>"Certainly," answered Harry. "I had forgotten +about the other. And while we are about it, why not +have the band come along?"</p> + +<p>This was answered by a shout. One of the new +acquirements of the natives of Wonder Island, was +music, and when the boys returned from the States<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_81" id="p_81" href="#p_81">p. 81</a></span> +they brought along several fine sets of band instruments, +one set of which was always on the vessel, and +was used for evening concerts.</p> + +<p>"Where is Mano?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>Mano was the leader of the ship's band, but he was +not to be found.</p> + +<p>"John sent for Mano an hour ago, and he is now +in the village."</p> + +<p>"Then send for him at once. Tell him he must +be here as soon as John is through with him," said +George.</p> + +<p>While the flags were being wrapped up one of the +small boats came from the shore, and Mano stepped +out.</p> + +<p>Harry ran up and said: "Get the boys and the +instruments ready. You must play for us to-day +during the ceremonies."</p> + +<p>Mano smiled as he answered: "John told me +about it last night, and I went over merely to find +out what music I should take."</p> + +<p>"So John tried to steal a march on us?" remarked +Harry. "How soon will you be ready?"</p> + +<p>"We are all ready now. I was told at the Chief's +house that the procession would start in a half hour."</p> + +<p>When the flags were brought out it was Mano's +time to stare. "I think," he said, "that will surprise +John, but the idea is a proper one."</p> + +<p>The band comprised nine musicians and the +two drummers. The moment they landed the band +formed four abreast, and directly behind were the +two boys with the Stars and Stripes. To the tune +of "Columbia, the Gem of the Ocean," they marched +straight to the home of the Chief.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_82" id="p_82" href="#p_82">p. 82</a></span></p> + +<p>The crashing music, and the magnificent flags +brought pandemonium to that savage village. Nothing +like it had ever been known before. Long before +the band reached the Palace all the inhabitants of the +town had rushed down, and at Uraso's and Muro's +suggestion the people followed behind, and thus made +a procession which was the most unique that it was +possible to describe.</p> + +<p>"That scheme will make a success of the ceremonies," +remarked George, almost too full for utterance. +"Why the thing wouldn't be a success without +the flags and the music."</p> + +<p>"I wonder how the thing will fit in when it comes +to the sacrifices this afternoon? I imagine the +Korinos ought to feel like dying when they are to +have such an unusual funeral procession?" Harry +said this with a bit of irony, as he turned to George +and grinned at the idea.</p> + +<p>John knew what was coming, but the Chief didn't. +He and John came out together, when they heard the +music. The boys, behind the band could not see the +great sights that were taking place in the rear, but +John stood there beside the big Chief, and was simply +convulsed with laughter.</p> + +<p>The natives were not walking. They were dancing, +and the Chief, at first astounded at the music, +and at the waving flags, soon joined John in laughter +as they witnessed this remarkable scene.</p> + +<p>Uraso had taken part in numerous celebrations at +Unity, and knew what disposition to make of the people +when they arrived. The band marched past, and +John raised his hand in the form of a salutation, +and the Chief noticing this imitated him.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_83" id="p_83" href="#p_83">p. 83</a></span></p> + +<p>"The old fellow is learning rapidly how to do the +correct thing," suggested Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes; John will have him in a swallow-tail coat +before night."</p> + +<p>The band marched past, and then turned around +and came back, and as fast as the people came up +Uraso and Muro directed them where to stand, so +that when the band stopped they formed a large +semi-circle facing the Chief and John.</p> + +<p>The boys walked forward so they stood with the +flags midway between the band and the Chief. The +latter motioned for the band to continue. John understood, +and a new tune was struck up. The Chief +was fascinated. When that tune was concluded, the +Chief wanted another, quite forgetting the importance +of the ceremonial rites.</p> + +<p>While the last tune was being played the boys saw +a tall man, with a huge spear, and a face most hideously +painted. His body had characteristic stripes, +entirely unlike those of the other people. Behind +him marched the Korinos, without a sign or mark on +them different from the costumes worn by them on +the preceding day.</p> + +<p>As they filed along behind the leader, the boys +noticed that the first one carried a thong-like rope: +the second a knife; the third a sort of vessel, and the +fourth a pair of short sticks.</p> + +<p>The people paid no attention to them, while the +band was playing, but when it ceased, it was evident +that they shrunk back from these dreaded men.</p> + +<p>John beckoned Uraso and Muro to come forward, +and the Chief welcomed them. "As chiefs of your +tribes you should be here with us. The White Chief<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_84" id="p_84" href="#p_84">p. 84</a></span> +tells me that in his country the band and the flag always +go first, and I have asked him to tell us how we +should march to the forest."</p> + +<p>John then told those present how the procession +should form. The band was marched to the front, +and George, who had the small flag, was placed directly +behind the band. Then the Chief, with Uraso +and Muro on either side, and directly behind them +Harry took position with the large flag.</p> + +<p>After the flag the Korinos, without their tall +leader, however, were placed in line. John then motioned +to the people to take their places following the +Korinos, and the moment the column was thus formed +the band struck up a lively marching tune, and John +accompanied by the tall fantastic leader, went ahead +of the band.</p> + +<p>The leader knew, of course, where the procession +must go, and he thus wisely made the arrangement +for the occasion. The procession wended its way directly +to the north, along a well-beaten path, and +after ascending a hill, turned to the left, and entered +a sort of grove.</p> + +<p>The boys were delighted to notice the magnificent +Magnolia trees in full bloom, the flowers of which +surpassed anything they had ever seen, and the perfume +was almost overpowering in its intensity.</p> + +<p>To the boys this peculiar procession had something +mysterious about it. Neither John, nor the two +Chiefs had any idea of its significance. John directed +a questioning look toward the articles which +the Korinos carried.</p> + +<p>When the crest of the hill was reached they made +one complete circle, and the head of the column<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_85" id="p_85" href="#p_85">p. 85</a></span> +stopped before the most magnificent magnolia tree +in the grove. The leader marched along the line +and the people soon formed themselves into a circle +with the tree in the center.</p> + +<p>All chatter had stopped. While ascending the hill, +and up to this time, there was a never ending clatter +of voices; but now all were quiet, and gazed to the +top of the tree. The tall leader, at the nod of the +Chief came forward and approached the tree, and +with the long spear struck it three times, and then +turned to the Korinos, who had now followed him.</p> + +<p>Then, he turned again, and struck the tree three +times more, and this was repeated the third time. +After stepping back he raised the spear, and held it +over the head of the Korino who carried the rope. +The latter stepped to the tree and with a dextrous +throw sent a coil of rope over the first limb and +caught the other end of it.</p> + +<p>The spear was then laid over the head of the man +with the knife, and he sprang forward grasping the +rope, and when the spear was poised on high, he +gracefully crept hand over hand up the rope.</p> + +<p>The instant the man's hand seized the rope the +people fell to the ground and covered their faces. +The boys did not want to lose this part of the ceremony, +you may be sure, but they tried to observe +the rites.</p> + +<p>A side glance was sufficient to assure them that the +Chief did not kneel, nor did either John, Uraso or +Muro; but they were privileged characters, so the +boys went through the ceremony by peering through +their fingers, and at the same time trying to find out +whether there were not others trying to do the same.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_86" id="p_86" href="#p_86">p. 86</a></span></p> + +<p>The man went up and up, and soon emerged from +the last spare branches at the top, until his face was +near the great white flower which grew on the tip.</p> + +<p>"I think that is the flower all the people were looking +at," said George in a whisper.</p> + +<p>The man raised the knife, and with one slash +severed the stem. Then, raising himself up to his +full height, so his body could be plainly seen, he +waved the flower about his head three times, and the +leader at the base of the tree again struck the trunk +three times.</p> + +<p>Immediately the people arose and placed their +hands before them exactly like a bather on a perch +about to dive, and with the palms of the hands thus +placed against each other, the arms were raised to a +vertical position, and lowered three times.</p> + +<p>With hands still in their lowered position, and eyes +cast on the ground, the Korino in the tree slowly descended, +and the one who threw the rope quickly detached +it from the tree.</p> + +<p>The spear was then placed over the head of the +man with the sticks. He crossed his legs and sat +down, and with an exceedingly rapid motion, soon +caused smoke to arise, and then a tiny flame appeared.</p> + +<p>"Why didn't they tell us about it, and we could +have let them use some of our matches," said George +dryly, as Harry made a great show of indignation +at the irrelevant remark.</p> + +<p>A fire was quickly kindled, and the man with the +bowl knelt down, after fixing two stones on opposite +sides of the fire. From a small receptacle he +took a powder, and dropped it into the bowl, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_87" id="p_87" href="#p_87">p. 87</a></span> +after holding the flower aloft, the man who took it +from the tree, dropped it into the smoking bowl.</p> + +<p>Instantly the people resumed their natural poses, +and began to dance. The Chief spoke a word to +Uraso, and the band struck up a lively tune. Then, +to the ringing blare of the band, and the shrieks +and shouts of the people the dance began. It was +one continuous whirl, and many of them became +frenzied.</p> + +<p>The Chief himself participated in this part of the +ceremony, and swung himself around and around in +a giddy whirl. During all this time each fellow was +for himself. They did not have partners as in the +civilized dances.</p> + +<p>The tangoing was an individual effort, and each +enjoyed it in his own way, but they all kept step to +the music, showing the savage characteristic of being +able to observe rhythmic effects.</p> + +<p>The boys caught the spirit of the occasion, and +joined in the wild swirl. Uraso and Muro were at it, +and the sole spectator was John, who said that he felt +too old to learn the new steps.</p> + +<p>When the band stopped the people rested, but there +was no disposition to break up the merry party, and +when the music again struck up the whole scene was +acted over again. It was noon before the grand ball +ceased.</p> + +<p>Then, at a sign from the Chief the procession reformed, +and went back over the trail, the people +dancing all the way, and, apparently, without exhibiting +any signs of weariness, although it must be stated +that the band was nearing collapse, when the people +dispersed.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_88" id="p_88" href="#p_88">p. 88</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>As</span> heretofore stated, there had been no morning +meal, and the dancing must have been a trying task, +under those conditions.</p> + +<p>"It would have been much better if we had something +to eat before this part of the ceremony. I am +so hungry I could eat anything," remarked George, +as they neared the village.</p> + +<p>"The natives do not think so. That is part of the +ceremony. It must be carried out before a meal is +taken," answered John, "or it will not have the +proper effect."</p> + +<p>Uraso overheard the remark, and he added: +"The Chief said they had never known such a scene +as took place to-day, and that it was not a part of +the regular ceremony to have the dancing at that +time, but that the wonderful music seemed to win +every one."</p> + +<p>"I heard him say it was the first time in years +that he had danced. How he enjoyed it," remarked +Muro. "I admit that it was the best dance I had +since the boys got back. That was a big time at +Unity when you returned."</p> + +<p>"I think," said Harry, "that was the queerest performance +I ever heard of. What a foolish thing to +cut a flower from the top of a tree, and go through<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_89" id="p_89" href="#p_89">p. 89</a></span> +all that ceremony, using Old Fantastic with his flourishing +spear to conduct the ridiculous rites."</p> + +<p>"Do you think it is any more foolish than many +things which civilized people do?" asked John.</p> + +<p>Harry mused a while, and then continued: "Probably +not, when I think of it, but with us the ceremonies +really mean something; at least, it seems +to me that they are intended to."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and that is generally so with the native rites. +Sometimes the origin is rather obscure, but everything +of this character comes from something in the +past, of which it is symbolic. Spencer, in his work +on 'Evolutions of Ceremonial Forms of Government,' +recites a curious instance of this, where he +shows that the habit of stroking the mustache is a +survival of scalping."</p> + +<p>The boys laughed. "That must be pretty well +far-fetched," responded George.</p> + +<p>"Do you think so?" answered John. "He reasons +it in this way. It was, formerly the custom, among +most savage tribes, to take the hair of victims, to be +used as personal adornment, or to indicate the valor +of the warrior. Among some tribes in the Philippines +and also in the interior of Africa, the custom +is to take the head of an enemy."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean the Head hunters?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; you have probably heard a great deal about +them since we acquired the Philippines. When men +began to get a little higher in the scale of civilization, +the victor required some token of submission from +the conquered, so the latter plucked a wisp of hair +from his head and presented it to indicate defeat. +During the seventeenth century it was the rule of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_90" id="p_90" href="#p_90">p. 90</a></span> +Spanish Court that all inferiors, in addressing superiors, +must stroke the mustache, and this came +from the old idea of the hair token."</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose that the taking of the flower has +any particular significance?"</p> + +<p>"Most assuredly! There must be a flower before +there can be fruit. This is the beginning of the season +or the beginning of the year, to these people, +and the largest-flower, at the top of the greatest +tree is the one taken while it is at full bloom, and +incinerated."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 367px;"> +<a id="illus-093" name="illus-093" /> +<a href="#p_91"> +<img src="images/illus-093-fig7.png" width="367" height="262" +alt="Fig. 7. The Mistletoe" title="Fig. 7. The Mistletoe" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 7. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mistletoe</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Is that what they did in that bowl-shaped vessel?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and I imagine they will use the ashes in some +part of their rites."</p> + +<p>"Did you ever know of other tribes that do anything +like that?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_91" id="p_91" href="#p_91">p. 91</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes; very many; in fact most savage tribes have +some sort of rites which they scrupulously follow +out as a religious duty. Ancient history records +many such practices in detail. Thus, the Druids, +a peculiar class, or order of priests, which existed +among the Celtic races, attributed a sacred or mystic +character to plants, and venerated the oak tree."</p> + +<p>"I have read that they offered up human sacrifices," +said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes; I was coming to that. But do you know +that they regarded the mistletoe as an antidote +for all poisons and a cure for all diseases? +At certain seasons in the year it would be +gathered, and with the greatest ceremonies one of +the priests would ascend the tree on which it was +found, and cut it off with a golden knife."</p> + +<p>"But is the mistletoe found on the Oak?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but it grows more frequently on the Apple +tree. The seeds are distributed by birds, and owing +to the fact that it is found so infrequently on the +oak, the Druids considered it peculiarly sacred on +that account."</p> + +<hr class='sorta' /> + +<p>The delicious odor of the roasted food, which met +the people on their return, was a compensation for +the lack of the morning breakfast. The Chief had +invited John, Uraso, Muro, the two boys, and Stut, +to accompany him to his home.</p> + +<p>There in the open court, if it might so be called, +were the viands in the greatest profusion. They +were surprised to see that at each place was a couch, +and before every visitor was laid a bountiful supply +of food. In all their wanderings George and Harry<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_92" id="p_92" href="#p_92">p. 92</a></span> +never ate with a greater relish than on the present +occasion.</p> + +<p>The meal the previous day, was not at all comparable +to this. It would have vied with many a +meal set before our civilized gastronomies. The +table implements, it is true, were not found in profusion, +but the wooden forks, or prongs were good +substitutes for the more refined articles, and for +plates hollowed bark sections were found serviceable.</p> + +<p>The Sarsaparilla drink was the most favored +liquid. "I wish we had some ice for it," suggested +Harry. "It will be a good thing to bring over some +ice for the Chief. I think he would enjoy it."</p> + +<p>"By the way, Harry, did you see what they did +with the Korinos?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Shut them up in that dark hole back of the +house."</p> + +<p>"I wonder if they have given them anything to +eat?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, no!" said Muro. "They are to be sacrificed +this afternoon, and it wouldn't do to feed them."</p> + +<p>"Poor fellows!" remarked George, as he gazed +vacantly before him, lost in contemplation.</p> + +<p>"Well, they have been found out, and will now be +dealt with in accordance with their law."</p> + +<p>"Was that tall fellow one of them?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; he is the principal chief of the Korinos. Do +you know they tried to escape last night?" exclaimed +Uraso.</p> + +<p>"Is that so? Where could they go in safety on +this island?"</p> + +<p>"To their caves, of course," remarked Harry.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_93" id="p_93" href="#p_93">p. 93</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes," added Uraso, "the Chief has no authority +under ground."</p> + +<p>The people gorged; so did the Chief. The meal +was a course dinner, at least so far as the time it +took to get through with all the dishes, and the boys +smiled as they saw the Chief slowly sink down, and +pass off into oblivion.</p> + +<p>John sat there, gazing on him, and slowly nodding +his head at the spectacle. He did not evince disgust, +and when George spoke to him about this peculiar +savage trait, he remarked: "Is he any worse than +many people in our own country, who do the same +thing? This is not gluttony with the savage; he +knows no better. This is one of the great enjoyments +of life which the savage knows. Teach him +something better and he will respond."</p> + +<p>"When you stop to think of it," replied George, +"I really don't see why it is such an awful thing to +eat until you are stuffed to sleepiness?"</p> + +<p>"The real argument against it is on sanitary +grounds," suggested John. "We regard gluttony +as bad because it is a selfish exhibition of taste and +habits, and in this I quite agree; but among savages +the custom of regularity in habits is not one of their +understood laws. I have known North American +Indians who could each devour from six to eight +pounds of beef, and drink two quarts of coffee at one +sitting. But those men would not eat another meal +for three days."</p> + +<p>During the meal hour there was a continual round +of merriment, and every one was enjoying himself +to the fullest extent. But now the hum of voices +ended. The boys were surprised.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_94" id="p_94" href="#p_94">p. 94</a></span></p> + +<p>"They are taking their noon-day siestas," said +John, laughing.</p> + +<p>The boys arose and passed out. It was true, indeed. +The men, and women too, were taking naps +everywhere, the grotesque figures lying where they +had eaten their food.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;"> +<a id="illus-097" name="illus-097" /> +<a href="#p_95"> +<img src="images/illus-097-fig8.png" width="361" height="263" +alt="Fig. 8. The Jacchus" title="Fig. 8. The Jacchus" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 8. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Jacchus</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>They made a tour. No one appeared to take any +notice of them, as they passed through the open +places between the huts, because all of the food was +eaten in the open, and not within the huts. The village +looked like one immense picnic ground.</p> + +<p>As they were returning toward the Chief's house +they caught sight of the hut in which the Korinos +were confined. To their astonishment two of them +were crawling out the enclosure, and the leader was +particularly noticeable, peering from the side of the +hut.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_95" id="p_95" href="#p_95">p. 95</a></span></p> + +<p>"Shall we give the alarm?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"No, no! See John; he will know what to do."</p> + +<p>As they passed the hut the guards lay in blissful +sleep, and seeing this the boys rushed in and excitedly +told John of the jail delivery and the advisability +of giving the alarm.</p> + +<p>He held up his hand, in caution, as he smiled at +the announcement. "Do you want the poor fellows +to be sacrificed?"</p> + +<p>"By no means."</p> + +<p>"Then let them go. Possibly the Chief may find +some way to get them back."</p> + +<p>Two hours later the village took on another aspect. +It was now about five o'clock in the afternoon, but +in the meantime boy-like they had investigated every +part of the surrounding scenery, being particularly +interested in the monkeys which were seen in the +trees everywhere.</p> + +<p>The most amusing to the boys was a small animal +that had a "beard all around his face," as George +expressed it. It was small, hardly exceeding a foot +in height, a sort of olive-gray color, and a round tail +twice the length of the body.</p> + +<p>"I think I know what you have reference to," suggested +John, when appealed to. "It is the Jacchus, +and is related to the Marmozets and the Tamarins. +They are very active, like squirrels, and live on nuts, +seeds, roots and fruit."</p> + +<p>The Chief awakened as the boys entered, and +within the next half hour was ready for the continuance +of the festival.</p> + +<p>"I should like to know what the next thing is on +the programme? This is a little inconvenient, not<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_96" id="p_96" href="#p_96">p. 96</a></span> +knowing just what is going to take place," was +George's observation.</p> + +<p>"John will know if any one does, but I suppose he +is too busy now with his Royal Highness," answered +Harry with a laugh.</p> + +<p>But the boys were not kept long in suspense. The +natives understood, as it appeared, for they were +soon congregated around the Palace, and now for +the first time the boys noticed a large, imposing-looking +native, who carried an immense knotted club. +To satisfy the reader's curiosity, it may be well to +describe him. He wore a loin cloth, made of the +skins of the small animals which were found all over +the island, and, to all appearances, at least a half +dozen different kinds of pelts were used to make up +the garment, the ends, or corners of which hung down +in points to form a fringe.</p> + +<p>At his ankles were two huge bands, made of cloth, +and plentifully decorated with spangles of shells, +and rows of nuts, strung on cords, like beads. +Around his neck and trailing down the back was a +collar of interwoven leaves, very artistically arranged, +if judged from the viewpoint of savage decorations.</p> + +<p>The head dress was unique, being made up of a +band of coarsely-woven cloth, literally covered with +large fish scales, and a pyramidal structure was fastened +to this band, and extended up beyond the crown +for a foot, or more. At its apex was a mass of +streamers, which fluttered around as the breeze +floated by.</p> + +<p>The weapon was fully five feet long, the head of +the club, for such it was, terminated in a gnarled<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_97" id="p_97" href="#p_97">p. 97</a></span> +knot, bristling with small points. This the boys recognized +to be somewhat similar to the wicked thing +that was carried by the Korino when he sought to +slay Tarra.</p> + +<p>The Chief was also differently attired. He was +literally covered with clothing, the different parts +being dyed with various colors without any regard +to harmony, or design. Like all the others he wore +no foot covering, but had bare feet.</p> + +<p>The crown was also a cloth band, but this was +surrounded by vertically-arranged thorns, huge +things that showed their bristling points, and wound, +or rather braided around them, were garlands of human +hair, of different hues.</p> + +<p>The Royal wand was an immense black staff, fully +two inches thick, and six feet long, one end of which +was pointed, the other end terminating within a large +calabash. This wand he held with the pointed end +upward.</p> + +<p>When he appeared at the doorway the people fell +down on their faces, and after a few words all arose, +and the man with the club turned toward the hut +where the Korinos were confined. Four of the +largest warriors accompanied him, while the people +looked on in expectancy.</p> + +<p>"The fun will now begin," whispered Harry, and +it surely did. The club bearer returned with a troubled +look, and addressed the Chief.</p> + +<p>The people soon learned of what had taken place, +and the commotion was evident. They speedily lost +all semblance of order, and began to run to and fro. +The scowl on the face of the Chief was terrible, nor +did he in the least attempt to conceal his anger.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_98" id="p_98" href="#p_98">p. 98</a></span></p> + +<p>With a vehemence that caused the crowd to shiver, +he gave a command, and in a moment three men were +brought forward, almost in a state of collapse with +terror written in their countenances. They were the +unfortunate guards, as the boys quickly saw.</p> + +<p>They were unable to answer the indictment of the +Chief, because the escape had been as much of a +surprise to them as to the Chief. Uraso and Muro +were quick to recognize the situation, and they informed +John of the progress of the conversation.</p> + +<p>The negligent guards had been condemned to take +the places of the Korinos, as sacrifices. The rites +demanded some victims, and the boys now saw that +the escape of the Korinos would not avoid the carrying +out of the bloody rites.</p> + +<p>The new, victims-to-be were firmly bound, and +placed in the center of the crowd, and, strangely +enough, it was now noticed that the people expressed +the same degree of hatred to the poor unfortunates +that they had manifested toward the Korinos an hour +before.</p> + +<p>The Chief was now at the head of the procession, +which, instead of going to the north, passed alongside +the slight elevation that led north of the grove, +and toward the high elevation which the boys had +noticed the day before.</p> + +<p>The march was but a short one, and when the +upper level was reached the boys were astounded to +see that beyond, and next to the hill, on the north, +was an open space, the floor of which was of solid +rock. This space covered nearly an acre, and near +the center was a flat rocky table, fully ten feet in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_99" id="p_99" href="#p_99">p. 99</a></span> +diameter and about four feet high, with a huge boulder +in the center of the table.</p> + +<p>The Chief and the victims marched directly to the +stone table, the executioner tramping with a measured +tread immediately ahead of the victims. The +people did not go near the rocky shelf, but circled +about at a respectful distance.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_100" id="p_100" href="#p_100">p. 100</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>All</span> those with the Chief's party, approached the +table, upon which the executioner mounted the rock, +and stood there, as though inviting the admiration +of the crowd.</p> + +<p>John spoke a few words to Uraso, and the latter +addressed the Chief as follows: "The White Chief +says that to offer these men as a sacrifice will be +against the wishes of the Great Spirit, if they are +destroyed by the weapon which is now in the hands +of the one on the rock."</p> + +<p>The Chief quickly turned. "What would the +White Chief have me do? I cannot free these culprits, +because it is the law that they shall die in +place of those who are appointed to be the victims."</p> + +<p>"The White Chief does not ask for their lives, +but only that the manner of their death shall be +changed."</p> + +<p>"That shall be done. What is the White Chief's +wish?"</p> + +<p>"He will be the executioner."</p> + +<p>The Chief threw his arms around Uraso's neck, +in raptures of joy, and turning to the man on the +table, ordered him to descend. John quietly conferred +with Uraso, and the latter mounted the table, +and the prisoners were led up until they faced him.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_101" id="p_101" href="#p_101">p. 101</a></span></p> + +<p>Uraso, addressing them, said: "You have been +condemned by your Chief to die because you have +deceived his people and brought sorrow on all. The +Great White Chief has seen the misery you have +caused by allowing the Korinos to escape, and you +must now take their places as the victims to appease +the Great Spirit.</p> + +<p>"The White Chief has asked to be permitted to +offer you up as sacrifices to his God, as well, and +the White Man's death is a terrible one. When you +die it will not cause you to go out of the world forgetting +all that you may suffer, but you will always +know and suffer through all time, and you will never +know a day that is free from misery.</p> + +<p>"Your dying will be like a thousand deaths, and +your living hours will be like fire that always burns +and never consumes."</p> + +<p>Thus Uraso went on, and as he spoke the poor +victims' eyes grew greater and greater, and the terror +more pronounced. He ceased for a moment and +John slowly walked to the table, and mounting it, +said quietly to Uraso: "Tell them that when I raise +my hands over my head the ends of their living +death will begin."</p> + +<p>When this was imparted, the agony on their faces +was pitiful to see. John advanced, and spread out +his palms toward them, and quickly drew his hands +toward him, and this was repeated three times.</p> + +<p>It is a curious thing that most savages believe +in the mysticism of some particular number. In +Africa some tribes, if they hear an animal cry four +times, will brave any danger, as it is a sign that the +bird has knowledge of safety to his person.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_102" id="p_102" href="#p_102">p. 102</a></span></p> + +<p>Others watch with great care the repetition of an +insect's call, and particularly the number of times +an unusual noise occurs, and the belief is somewhat +analogous to the views which white people have +about the cricket. Milton, Byron, Southey, and +Dickens have written stories about them, so it is +not to be wondered at that the poor benighted savages +should have some belief about such things.</p> + +<p>After the rites at the tree in the forest, it was +evident that three was the cryptic, or mysterious +number, and John used it on this occasion, for in +all the peculiar signs that he had previously employed, +three was the number that impressed itself +on the minds of the people, and it doubtless had its +effect on the condemned.</p> + +<p>Slowly John moved from side to side, and he now +saw the intense expression, as their eyes followed +his every motion. His motions grew less and less +rapid; he moved toward them, and then suddenly +retreated, and through all these evolutions the three +men's faces became more and more tense, and finally +the muscles of their faces relaxed, their eyes stared +with a blank expression, and the motions of John almost +ceased.</p> + +<p>The boys looked about them. They, too, had a +spell woven about them which they could not understand. +It was the most remarkable feeling they had +ever experienced. The multitude did not stir a +limb. The Chief was rigid, his face colorless, lips +parted, and eyes fixed at what he saw before him.</p> + +<p>Suddenly, John sprang forward, and raised both +arms high above his head, and instantly the three +men fell back and lay rigid, full length on the rock.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_103" id="p_103" href="#p_103">p. 103</a></span> +John turned, but while there were forms before him, +there was no sound. Hundreds of eyes gazed, but +they stared mutely.</p> + +<p>"I feel awfully funny," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Do you know what John has been doing?" asked +George.</p> + +<p>"I know; he has hypnotized the men!"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and everybody else!"</p> + +<p>When John turned, he waved his hand, the audience +relaxed its tension, and witnessed the death (?) +of the three men, an act performed by the White +Chief without having touched them. The Chief +slowly walked forward, and Uraso led him to the +platform, while John pointed to the mute victims.</p> + +<p>John motioned to Uraso to raise the first man by +lifting his feet while he grasped the shoulders, and +when the body was lifted up it was perfectly rigid. +The same exhibition was performed with the two +others. That they were dead, was apparent to the +Chief and the people.</p> + +<p>The people surged to and fro. John was a Korino +now, in the eyes of the people. When the people +pressed forward John spoke to Uraso, and he turned +to the people.</p> + +<p>"The White Chief says that there will be no more +sacrifices, because the Great Spirit wills it otherwise. +The Korinos must be brought from the +caves—"</p> + +<p>Uraso could get no further. The people were +aroused. Their voices could be heard uttering +threats against the witch doctors.</p> + +<p>John saw that they were determined to wreak +vengeance upon them, but he counseled them to be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_104" id="p_104" href="#p_104">p. 104</a></span> +wise and obey their Chief, and that the Korinos +would acknowledge their own error.</p> + +<p>The wives and children of the three guards were +present, as they were compelled to be, and, as may +well be imagined, their grief was terrible to behold.</p> + +<p>Uraso again spoke to the people, and said: "The +White Chief intends to show that the Great Spirit +does not wish sacrifices, and will give back the guards +to their families."</p> + +<p>When he ceased speaking John stooped forward, +and waved his hands three times, the motion being +formed by throwing his hands forward, palms downward, +and then slowly raising them up, and with an +upward and an outward swing, bringing them down +again.</p> + +<p>Then he advanced forward a few feet and held out +his arms horizontally, with the palms uppermost, +and speaking a few words, the arms were impressively +raised. As he did so the three men slightly +turned, and then almost simultaneously raised themselves +to a sitting posture, and glanced about wildly.</p> + +<p>The consternation on the part of the natives at +this sight was beyond all description. They were +awe stricken, and dumbfounded. Not the slightest +sound could be heard, as the men arose to their +feet.</p> + +<p>The only ones who were joyously affected were +the wives of the men who, at the words of Uraso, +sprang forward and were about to ascend the rock, +but at the command of John they leaped from the +table, and the children gathered about them.</p> + +<p>The Chief did not utter a word of protest. He +remained there utterly speechless. When John<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_105" id="p_105" href="#p_105">p. 105</a></span> +asked him what was the next thing to be done to carry +out the rites, he remained standing for some time +without answering.</p> + +<p>When he had gathered together his faculties he +turned to the people and said: "The Great White +Chief has shown his power, and proven to us that +our Korinos have lied to us. They must be destroyed. +Let the people return to the village, and +proceed with the feast. We shall be guided by the +White Chief."</p> + +<p>This was, indeed, the effect that John wished to +produce, but he did not also anticipate that the Chief +would insist upon the destruction of the Korinos.</p> + +<p>The feast that afternoon was a repetition on a +larger scale, of the feast of the day before. Indeed, +this was now the third day of feasting.</p> + +<p>"I don't know whether I can eat any more for a +few days," said Harry, as they neared the village, +and saw the preparations going on.</p> + +<p>George laughed, as he responded: "We shall +have to go through with this thing, whatever the +cost. Have you forgotten that they believe in <i>three</i> +for everything? Didn't John make three passes to +kill them; and three more to bring them to life again? +We have had two feasts, and must now have one +more. I don't know what the result will be if I eat +half as much even, as I did yesterday."</p> + +<p>John laughed heartily, as he added: "That is +correct, too, about the feasts. Notice from this time +on that about everything they do will be measured +by threes."</p> + +<p>As the boys afterwards remarked, they never +knew how they got through the feast that day, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_106" id="p_106" href="#p_106">p. 106</a></span> +they tried to imitate John in partaking of the good +things in moderation.</p> + +<p>It was late in the night when the natives ceased +the dancing, which was the signal for the end of the +festival, although in many respects it was entirely +different from the previous ceremonies, as Uraso +and Muro learned in talking with the natives.</p> + +<p>The next day was ushered in with a rainstorm, the +first that was experienced on the island, and there +was no opportunity to make any excursions. It had +been John's intention to settle the fate of the Korinos, +as he felt that this was a matter that should +have his attention before they left on the further +explorations of the island.</p> + +<p>Since it was impossible to venture out far from +the village, John spent the most of the day attending +to the wounded and the sick, although they had +not been neglected in the meantime, not even during +the ceremonies of the past three days.</p> + +<p>The first visit was made to the quarters of the +white man who was found in the stockade when they +took possession of the village. It was evident from +the greeting that he and John had had several conversations +previous to this visit, but of this the latter +did not advise the boys.</p> + +<p>When they came into the room he was sitting up, +and he greeted John and the boys. He could speak, +but it was with a weak voice, and the boys ranged +themselves on one side while John seated himself +on the other.</p> + +<p>"You told me yesterday," began John, "that when +you were shipwrecked you were cast ashore on another +island. How many companions had you?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_107" id="p_107" href="#p_107">p. 107</a></span></p> + +<p>"Three," he answered. "One of them was a large +man, with brown hair and piercing eyes, who was +formerly an officer in the navy, and was at that +time engaged in an exploring capacity, and on his +way to Australia."</p> + +<p>"Did he walk with a limp?" asked John.</p> + +<p>The old man, as well as the boys, looked at John +in surprise. He quickly answered: "Yes; did you +know him?"</p> + +<p>"No," he replied; "but we found him less than a +month ago."</p> + +<p>The old man leaned forward in his eagerness. +"Where is he?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"He is dead," answered John, gravely.</p> + +<p>"Dead!" he exclaimed. "Dead! and do you know +his name?"</p> + +<p>"No, but we found his remains, together with the +boat to which he had been tied, on the shore of an +island south of this."</p> + +<p>"Then it is true, after all!" he muttered.</p> + +<p>"Did you know about it?" asked John, who was +the interested one now.</p> + +<p>"No, this is sad news to me. His name was Clifford,—Ralph +S. Clifford, and when he and Walter +undertook,—"</p> + +<p>The boys were all impatience now, as George cried +out: "Walter! did you know Walter?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; he was my companion for a time. He and +I were making explorations on the island on which +we were wrecked, and when the two undertook to go +on a search, to ascertain what the island was like, I +was too ill to go with them. Walter returned, and +told me of meeting with a band of savages on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_108" id="p_108" href="#p_108">p. 108</a></span> +western side of the mountain, and of the capture of +Clifford by the natives."</p> + +<p>"Did you know a man by the name of Wright?"</p> + +<p>"No, I never heard of any one by that name in +this section of the globe."</p> + +<p>"Do you know what became of Walter?"</p> + +<p>"I was about to say, that we went north along the +shore, and camped near the beach, and there found +a boat, rather crudely made, with which we proposed +sailing around the island. Before we could +complete our arrangements, Walter disappeared."</p> + +<p>"Did he take the boat with him?"</p> + +<p>"No; the boat and all his effects were still with +me. I was still very ill, and I concluded to remain +there until my strength returned, but four days +afterwards, when I was able to move about, I found +that the boat had disappeared."</p> + +<p>The strain of the conversation appeared to affect +him, and the three visitors stated they would call +on him later for further information.</p> + +<p>When the boys returned to their huts, with John, +the latter was quiet and very much reserved. The +boys were so much interested in the story of the +old man, that they could not wait until they were +seated before they began to question him.</p> + +<p>"What do you think of his story?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>John did not answer promptly, as was his habit. +Instead, he reflected for some time, and at last said +slowly: "The story may be true. Clifford was, in +my opinion, tied to the boat and set adrift, and his +death was due to that, unquestionably."</p> + +<p>"Do you think this man had anything to do with +it?" asked George.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_109" id="p_109" href="#p_109">p. 109</a></span></p> + +<p>"So far, I have no direct reason for thinking so, +but there are several very curious things about the +story."</p> + +<p>"What in particular do you have in mind?"</p> + +<p>"He said the boat was found on the seashore, and +that Walter left without taking it with him, but that +when he recovered the boat was gone."</p> + +<p>"Is it an unreasonable story?"</p> + +<p>"That is not at all improbable. The tide might +have washed it away, but, if it was our boat, and +it was provided with the peculiar rope and the +strange oars, that were found in it when it was recovered +by you, it would be interesting to know +whether he or Walter put them there."</p> + +<p>"Why is that so interesting to know?"</p> + +<p>"Because the rope found in that boat, is the same +as the rope we took from Clifford's body, which +you discovered on Venture Island."</p> + +<p>"If we could only find Walter now it would solve +that mystery," said Harry. "I don't like to think +that this man was instrumental in the Clifford tragedy."</p> + +<p>"Nor do I," responded John. "It is evident there +is some connection between that boat and the skeleton, +and that our boat played a part in it." This +ended the conversation on this point.</p> + +<p>It will be remembered that two of the men rescued +from the prison stockade, were natives of another +tribe, who had been captured some weeks before. +Upon inquiry John found that they had disappeared +the day before.</p> + +<p>The two others, in a very emaciated condition, +were still under John's care, and rapidly improving.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_110" id="p_110" href="#p_110">p. 110</a></span> +No attempts had been made to question them, and +as it was the intention of the boys to commence the +trip to the north, as soon as John had settled the +matter with the Korinos, they were anxious to get +some information from them concerning their tribe.</p> + +<p>Accompanying Uraso, and through him, they first +learned that the people they were now living with +were called Malosos, and that the Chief was named +Ta Babeda, which meant the <i>strong man</i>. He was +not so large as Beralsea, the Chief of Venture +Island, but his muscles were more active, thus the +boys could see that he rightly acquired the sceptre +of chief ruler, as did Beralsea, because of the +strength he possessed, and there was no one on the +island to question his king-ship.</p> + +<p>While rambling about the boys and Uraso were +informed that John wished to see them at the Chief's +house, and they went over without delay. Entering +the house, they were surprised to see that the +different packages containing the presents had been +opened, and were about to be distributed.</p> + +<p>The Chief and his household were first provided +for. The articles consisted of coats, and different +articles of wear for the Chief, together with a watch, +a revolver, and a camera.</p> + +<p>"This will give both of you boys an opportunity +to give the Chief some lessons in these instruments," +said John.</p> + +<p>The articles for the women were received with +screams of delight that pleased the Chief beyond +measure. Bits of lace, the like of which had never +been seen on the island, cotton fabric, beads, articles +of ornamentation, and finally full-fledged dresses,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_111" id="p_111" href="#p_111">p. 111</a></span> +were only parts of the gifts which went to the women +and children.</p> + +<p>"With your permission," said John, to the Chief, +"I will offer gifts to your people, and you may state +that during the afternoon the articles will be arranged +in packages so that all will receive presents +of like value."</p> + +<p>The boys, as well as Uraso and Muro, were busy +making up the gifts for distribution. During the +remaining portion of the day they were busily engaged +in this work, which brought the greatest joy +and happiness to the natives.</p> + +<p>It may well be imagined that Uraso and Muro were +not slow in imparting the news of Wonder Island +to the natives. John had a long conference with the +Chief on the same subject.</p> + +<p>"But how can we get these articles?" he asked, +as John told him how they made the wonderful +things.</p> + +<p>"You can make them here," he answered.</p> + +<p>"But we cannot make them if we do not have the +tools."</p> + +<p>"Then you can buy them," responded John.</p> + +<p>"But what have we that you want?" he asked, as +he eagerly scanned John's face.</p> + +<p>"Your land is full of things that the people in +Wonder Island want, and the whole world will buy +them of you."</p> + +<p>"Will you tell me what they want and how we +shall get them ready for you?"</p> + +<p>"It will give us pleasure to send our people over +who can tell you what spices, and nuts, and coffee, +and other things which you have in abundance, can<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_112" id="p_112" href="#p_112">p. 112</a></span> +be prepared, and what they are worth, and it will +be the means of giving the people work, and peace +and contentment."</p> + +<p>"But if we do not have any more fighting with +our enemy there will be no need of a strong Chief," +he remarked, thinking of his new relation to the +scheme as outlined.</p> + +<p>"There will be a much greater need of a strong +man like you, who can mete out equal justice to the +people," remarked John.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_113" id="p_113" href="#p_113">p. 113</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>But</span> the time was now at hand, when it became +necessary for the exploring expedition to the north. +The rescued prisoners stated that their people, while +not so numerous, were very warlike, and by degrees, +John learned that they were the cannibals of whom +they had heard.</p> + +<p>The tribe was known as the Umbolos, and the +Chief was a frightful man, unlike any other in the +tribe, or, at any rate, from the description, he was +not formed like them. He was known as Rumisses, +which in their tongue meant <i>thunder</i>.</p> + +<p>It was remarkable that Uraso and Muro understood +most of the words of the language used by the +natives here and also on Venture Island. On Wonder +Island, there were only two tongues, or dialects, +and the people on this island, as well as on +Venture Island, spoke the dialect belonging to the +Illyas, Kurabus and the Tuolos, the tribes that were +the fiercest and the most difficult to subdue.</p> + +<p>It was hoped that the escape of the two Umbolos, +and the return to their people would be sufficient to +give them the entree to that part of the country, +but after the questionings of John on this point, it +was very doubtful whether this would impress itself +on their minds.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_114" id="p_114" href="#p_114">p. 114</a></span></p> + +<p>The natives had been accustomed for so long a +period to regard every other people as an enemy, +and consequently absolutely removed from any possibility +of friendship, that it was questionable +whether the messengers could persuade the Chief to +receive them.</p> + +<p>Arrangements for the departure were decided +upon, and they planned to start early in the morning. +John visited the Chief, and suggested that he +should consider it a favor if the Chief would permit +him to take the Korinos with him.</p> + +<p>The Chief opened his eyes in astonishment. +"Why do you wish to be burdened with men who +will live by deceiving?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"But they have lived to the best of their knowledge. +They do not know any better. They believe +what they have been taught, and think it is a duty to +carry out and practice their rites. They do not wish +to deceive you."</p> + +<p>The Chief pondered for a long time, and then replied: +"What will you do with them?"</p> + +<p>"I want to teach them the white man's ways, and +tell them to come back and teach your children the +things which we believe are right and for the good +of the people."</p> + +<p>The lessons which John imparted were sources of +wonder and amazement to the ruler, who, five days +before, thought he was the only one appointed to +make and to execute laws.</p> + +<p>When he finally gave his consent, he said: "You +must take it upon yourself to get the Korinos, because +they will not come out of their caves."</p> + +<p>"But how can they find food there? If you pre<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_115" id="p_115" href="#p_115">p. 115</a></span>vent +them from getting food they will be compelled +to come out or starve."</p> + +<p>"They will starve before they will permit themselves +to be taken."</p> + +<p>"Then," answered John, "why do you not order +your warriors to enter the cave and take them by +force?"</p> + +<p>"But who dares to go in?"</p> + +<p>"I dare to go in, but you must order me to do so," +answered John.</p> + +<p>The Chief jumped up in an instant. "And will +you go?" he asked in the greatest delight.</p> + +<p>"By all means. You must go with me to the cave, +and there command me to enter and bring them +forth."</p> + +<p>The Chief's eyes danced with delight, and he could +hardly await the hour for starting on the mission.</p> + +<p>The boys and the two companion chiefs, were in +their glory upon hearing of the decision to get the +Korinos. Before leaving the Chief John questioned +him very closely on the location of the cave, and +whether there were not other caves on the island to +the north.</p> + +<p>"I have heard that there is another one to the +north, that was used in olden times by the Korinos +who lived when my father was Chief. I also know +that far to the north where the false and treacherous +Umbolos live, are great caves which no man may +enter."</p> + +<p>"Do they have Korinos in the Umbolo tribe?"</p> + +<p>"No; they do not believe in a Great Spirit."</p> + +<p>"Then, if they have no Korinos, why do they not +dare to enter the caverns?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_116" id="p_116" href="#p_116">p. 116</a></span></p> + +<p>"Because they have been told that it is death to +go into the dark."</p> + +<p>"Do you know why they think so?"</p> + +<p>"Because, a long time ago, the only man who ever +returned from the dark caves, brought out the bones +of men who had died there."</p> + +<p>"But it did not kill that man who brought them +out?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; he died. And now no one dares enter those +places."</p> + +<p>It may be imagined how this intelligence stirred +up the boys. It was impossible to keep them from +talking about it. To John it was like a magic wand; +it seemed to wave before his eyes and to talk to him. +What if they had really found the great cave on +which John's heart was so keenly bent?</p> + +<p>But the Korinos must be freed. That afternoon, +just before starting, the boys were surprised to see +the band coming up the street. How they laughed, +as they scented John's little ruse. It would, indeed, +be a treat to bring the Korinos out of their dark resorts +to some good old marching tune.</p> + +<p>The band struck up a familiar air, and to its lively +tones the procession, with the three Chiefs and John +at the head, marched across the open, and up the +hill past the grove, on its way to the cave on the +eastern slope of the high hill which rose from the +shore of the ocean.</p> + +<p>There was jest and laughter, the Chief enjoying +the treat that would be the greatest pleasure of his +life, namely, the bringing of the Korinos out of the +cave.</p> + +<p>After ascending the great hill, so that they over<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_117" id="p_117" href="#p_117">p. 117</a></span>looked +the ocean, the Chief informed John that the +entrance was a third of the way down the hill, and +the narrow path was followed which led around to +the north, shutting out the sight of the sea.</p> + +<p>After a few hundred feet, the path led to a cleft +portion of the rocks, where the light of the sun +was completely hidden. The walls of the rocks, at +the entrance of the cleft portion, were fully fifty +feet high, and were at least twenty feet apart, but +as they went on the walls drew nearer together and +the path ascended a slight incline.</p> + +<p>A sharp turn was reached, and they found themselves +in a little cove, to the left of which was a dark +entrance, toward which the Chief nodded, as he +shrank back.</p> + +<p>John motioned to the Chief, and the latter sternly +commanded John to bring forth the Korinos. John +said a few words to Uraso and Muro, and also invited +the boys to accompany them.</p> + +<p>"I suppose you are all armed?" said John.</p> + +<p>The boys and the chiefs had come well prepared, +so this point was taken care of.</p> + +<p>"But where are the lights?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"I have them," said John, "but we shall not use +them now, for reasons which will be explained later." +Together they entered the cave, the darkness of +which was appalling. After going in fully a hundred +and fifty feet, John stopped and said: "It +would have been a sign of weakness to go in with +a light. When we have gone far enough to be free +from the mouth of the cave, we can use our flash +lights. For the present we shall move on to ascertain +whether the Korinos are provided with lights,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_118" id="p_118" href="#p_118">p. 118</a></span> +which will show where they are, and we may thus be +guided to them."</p> + +<p>The distance traveled must have been fully a thousand +feet, when John again spoke: "I shall now +throw the light directly ahead, and you must keep +your eyes open to detect anything moving."</p> + +<p>The light flashed, and was then moved slowly to +the left, until it reached a cove at the extreme eastern +side, where there was an evident assemblage of +articles, not a hundred feet in advance of them, but +there was not a sign of living beings within the scope +of the light beams.</p> + +<p>The company moved over to the spot indicated. A +moment's examination satisfied them that it was +really the abode of the Korinos, but they had disappeared.</p> + +<p>The debris, the half eaten portions of food, some +still warm, were sufficient to indicate that they had +fled, but where? Uraso, Muro and John, all three, +flashed their lights, and, after examining the walls +critically, Muro was the first to find the opening +from the chamber in which they were standing.</p> + +<p>The outlet from the chamber was to the north, +and toward it the explorers ran hurriedly, and +passed along the contracted path, which soon turned +to the left. After following its many windings, and +scrambling over the broken and rocky floor, they saw +ahead a streak of daylight, which gladdened the +hearts of the boys.</p> + +<p>"Ah! they have gone," exclaimed John, as he +emerged, and glanced across the ravine, and along +the walls which extended up from the shore of a +little stream below. "They have gone to the north,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_119" id="p_119" href="#p_119">p. 119</a></span> +and have, probably, tried to seek safety in the other +cave."</p> + +<p>"How are we going to get back?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Do you think there will be any trouble in that?" +asked John.</p> + +<p>"We shall have to go clear over the mountain for +that, I'm afraid."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 362px;"> +<a id="illus-122" name="illus-122" /> +<a href="#p_118"> +<img src="images/illus-122-fig9.png" width="362" height="322" +alt="Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island" title="Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 9. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Cave</span> <span class="u">on</span> <span class="u">Rescue</span> <span class="u">Island</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"We are not far from the entrance," said John, +"and if we intend to catch up with the Korinos, we +must not delay for a moment."</p> + +<p>The party made a hurried trip around the hill, and +the Chief was surprised to learn that there was another +entrance, or an outlet to the cave on the north<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_120" id="p_120" href="#p_120">p. 120</a></span>ern +side. None of his warriors was aware of this, +however.</p> + +<p>John was now in a quandary. He was exceedingly +anxious to secure the Korinos, but at the same time +there was some things in the appearance of the cave +that he wished to investigate. This was confided to +Uraso and Muro, and the latter suggested that he +and Uraso would undertake to follow the fleeing +men, and return to the village, while John and the +boys made the desired investigation.</p> + +<p>This was readily assented to, and they at once +made their way across the hill, while John informed +the Chief of the action which they had decided to +take. One of the principal men of the village, in +whom the Chief had confidence, and who knew the +location of the upper caves, accompanied Uraso and +Muro.</p> + +<p>The Chief, and those with him returned to the +village, while John remained behind under the pretense +that he wished to stay at the cave entrance +until they returned from the pursuit after the Korinos.</p> + +<p>The boys first secured the flash lights which the +two chiefs had brought, and when all had departed +the boys and John entered the cave and marched +directly to the location of their interior home.</p> + +<p>Every part of the habitation was well investigated. +Almost every kind of tool and implement +was found here in profusion, but singularly, none +of them appeared to be used. Several flint lock +guns, all rusted, and with decayed stocks, were +among the articles discovered, but the Korinos had +not used them.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_121" id="p_121" href="#p_121">p. 121</a></span></p> + +<p>The inevitable copper vessels, entirely unlike those +of modern manufacture, were the first things to +claim the attention of the boys, as they recalled similar +articles found in the caves thitherto investigated +by them.</p> + +<p>"This begins to look as though we are to have +the same experience we had at the cave at the Cataract," +said George. "These vessels, no doubt, +were brought here by the buccaneers, and I'll be +surprised if we don't find a few more of their belongings +somewhere in this place."</p> + +<p>After all the recesses in this vicinity had been +investigated they scanned the side walls to the right, +carefully going into the little recesses which were +found all along the jagged sides.</p> + +<p>A hundred feet south of the living part of the +cave they came, unexpectedly upon a large extension, +not noticed before in their pursuit of the Korinos. +The chamber extended in a southerly direction, +and narrowed at the extreme opposite end.</p> + +<p>"This has the appearance of leading to another +outlet, which would take us to the southern side of +the hill. It would be remarkable, indeed, if such +should be the case," said John, as he eagerly pressed +forward, until they had passed four chambers.</p> + +<p>The walls were coming closer and closer, until +there was now barely room for them to pass through, +but they went in unhesitatingly, John in the lead. +The passage was not straight, so that the light did +not aid much in looking ahead, but suddenly the +flash threw a beam ahead, which showed that they +were at the entrance of a chamber.</p> + +<p>John stopped and directed the search light to all<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_122" id="p_122" href="#p_122">p. 122</a></span> +parts of the cavern. It appeared to be nearly round, +with a perfectly smooth floor. It was unoccupied, +but in the exact center of the chamber was a raised +object, like a mound.</p> + +<p>Throughout the entire cave could be found the +calcareous deposit so common in caves formed in +limestone rocks, and the stalactite hangings on the +ceilings and walls, and the stalagmites on the floors +made the scene a weird one.</p> + +<p>John glanced upwardly to view the ceiling, above +the mound, and said: "That does not seem to be +a natural formation. Let us examine it first."</p> + +<p>With the small pick which John always carried, +and by means of which he was always careful to +examine rocks and geological formations, while on +these tours, the top parts of the stalagmites were +chipped off. This was an exceedingly simple matter, +since they are generally soft.</p> + +<p>After the top layer was removed, the part beneath +readily yielded, but before they had an opportunity +to dig into it very deeply the pick struck +something which gave forth a metallic sound. John +stopped as though paralyzed.</p> + +<p>The pick was again driven in. Again the plain +contact with some hard substance. The digging was +now feverish, and when the broken parts were +cleared away, a small metallic box, about twelve +inches square across the top, and about ten inches +deep, was exposed to view.</p> + +<p>The dent made by the pick was clearly visible, and +the fresh mark showed that the metal was red.</p> + +<p>"It is copper!" said John.</p> + +<p>Every part of the material around the box was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_123" id="p_123" href="#p_123">p. 123</a></span> +removed, and this enabled them to remove it from +its resting place. John grasped it and securing a +good hold, finally raised it.</p> + +<p>"No, it is not any heavier than I thought it would +he," he remarked as he lay it down.</p> + +<p>"Did you expect to find this?" asked George in +amazement.</p> + +<p>"No; this is a surprise to me as it is to you."</p> + +<p>"Then why did you make that remark?"</p> + +<p>"Because I believe that this box contains treasure +of untold value. I should have been surprised if +it weighed very much."</p> + +<p>"Could it not have contained treasure if it had +been heavy?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>John laughed, a peculiar exultant chuckle, as he +responded: "Not the kind of treasure I have had +in contemplation."</p> + +<p>The box was turned over and over. There was +not the sign of any lid, or crack which showed the +cover or means of opening it. "We must take this +out and open it at our leisure," remarked John, "but +before doing so it would be well to examine the +other outlets to this chamber, if it has any."</p> + +<p>The chamber was found, on measurement, to be +thirty feet in diameter, and the vaulted ceiling fully +thirty feet high, singularly uniform in the domed +formation, and not rough or jagged like the ceiling +of the other chamber which they had just left.</p> + +<p>The walls were absolutely solid on all sides, the +only entrance being by way of the narrow little passageway +through which they had come. Harry +picked up the box, and swung it up to his shoulder, +and, John leading the way, they filed out and passed<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_124" id="p_124" href="#p_124">p. 124</a></span> +through the chamber, quickly making their way to +the opening through which they first entered the +cave.</p> + +<p>Within an hour they were back in the village, and +found Muro there awaiting their arrival. "We +have found their trail, and they have not gone to +the upper cave. They are heading straight for the +tribe in the northern end of the island."</p> + +<p>"I am surprised at that," said John. "We must +consult the Chief about this," and without another +word, he hurriedly went over to the Chief, who was +as much astounded as John could be at the peculiar +significance of their actions.</p> + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_125" id="p_125" href="#p_125">p. 125</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>Instead</span> of conveying the copper box to the village +it was carried to the landing place and taken +to the vessel, where it could be examined later, when +they had more time. It was now of more importance +to keep in touch with Muro and Uraso, the +former of whom had gone to the north as soon as +he had given the report mentioned in the last chapter.</p> + +<p>On the return to the village they discussed the +affairs of the previous day, which John had abstained +from mentioning.</p> + +<p>"What is it that really makes the people act that +way when they are hypnotized!" asked George. "I +have heard it said that there isn't any truth in mesmerism."</p> + +<p>"Mesmerism is the old term used to designate certain +phenomena, which, originally, was supposed to +be a force that emanated from the mesmerist. It +is now known that hypnotism may be regarded as +artificial catalepsy."</p> + +<p>"But what is catalepsy?"</p> + +<p>"It is an affection produced by hysteria, during +which the patient's body becomes rigid. It is +claimed by some that somnambulism is one phase of +the hypnotic condition."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_126" id="p_126" href="#p_126">p. 126</a></span></p> + +<p>"But in what way do your motions act on the one +who is being hypnotized?"</p> + +<p>"The motions have nothing whatever to do with +producing the condition. That is for effect, merely. +Those who are able to bring about a mesmeric condition, +try to concentrate the mind on some particular +thing, and by making gentle motions, or +passes, this is more forcibly impressed on them."</p> + +<p>"What was the object of Uraso telling them that +the White Man's death was a terrible one, and trying +to frighten them?"</p> + +<p>"Merely to make them concentrate their minds on +one thing alone. Terror, or great fear, is one of +the things which tends to a cataleptic condition. +Great excitement, and sometimes excessive joy, have +been known to do the same thing."</p> + +<p>"Then the object is merely to bring the mind under +the control of the operator?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; what was originally considered as a power +flowing from the hypnotist, is nothing more than his +mental action or control which prevents the subject +from exercising his own volition."</p> + +<p>A few hours after they returned to the village +Uraso and Muro returned, with the information that +the Korinos were now within the territory of the +tribe to the north, and they wisely concluded it would +not be good policy to pursue them further, and their +prudence was commended by John.</p> + +<p>The natives were supremely happy in displaying +their gifts, and the Chief, while much annoyed at +the escape of the Korinos, was content to be relieved +of their presence, when, after numerous conversa<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_127" id="p_127" href="#p_127">p. 127</a></span>tions +with John, he realized that they were of no use +to him and his people.</p> + +<p>John announced that he intended to visit the tribe +to the north, and purposed starting the following +day. The Chief advised him to take with him all +the warriors in the village, because he felt sure they +would have a hostile reception.</p> + +<p>"It seems to me," replied John, "that would be +the wrong thing to do. I do not wish him to think +that my mission is a warlike one, and a large force +will be in the nature of an invasion of his territory."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps you are right; but we have found him +a difficult Chief to deal with. He is not like a man. +He cannot stand up straight, as we do, and he kills +and eats all who fall into his hands."</p> + +<p>This information was regarded by John as one of +the imagination, purely, so it did not weigh heavily on +his mind. What seemed to impress him most was +the fate of the poor fellows who had voluntarily +sought the protection of the cannibal Chief.</p> + +<p>"I would like to have your opinion as to the course +which the Chief will take when the Korinos fall into +his hands?" asked John.</p> + +<p>The Chief mused for a while, and then said: +"They have no Korinos and do not believe in them, +but they may tell the Chief that we tried to offer +them as sacrifices, and he may use them with his +people to stir up feelings of revenge against us."</p> + +<p>"But," replied John, "the captives you took, and +who have escaped may tell him of our treatment of +them and this may work in our favor."</p> + +<p>"I do not think so," he replied. "We have had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_128" id="p_128" href="#p_128">p. 128</a></span> +many instances where they have refused to make +friends with us, and for that reason we always had +war."</p> + +<p>"But have you not often sacrificed their people +when you have taken them in your wars?"</p> + +<p>"We have always done so."</p> + +<p>"Have any of your captives ever returned to +them?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"And have they always killed and eaten your people +when they captured them?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and none has ever returned to us. The +Korinos would not let us keep the captives, but said +that the Great Spirit told them they must be sacrificed."</p> + +<p>The foregoing information was sufficient to convince +John of one thing, namely, that it was really +the spirit of the Korinos which kept up the tribal +warfare, at least so far as one end of the conflict was +concerned.</p> + +<p>In spite of all the arguments advanced by the +Chief, John was determined to make the trip with +his own people, and thus avoid any feeling on the +part of the tribe, against their present friend.</p> + +<p>In the morning John called Stut, and advised him +to wait until the following day, when he should pull +up anchor and proceed to the north for a distance +not exceeding twenty miles, and then, seeking a safe +anchorage, to await news from him.</p> + +<p>With forty of his own trusted men, together with +Uraso and Muro, they set out on the march to the +north, cheered by the people of the village, who +came out to witness their departure. The old man<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_129" id="p_129" href="#p_129">p. 129</a></span> +who had been rescued, was still too weak to accompany +them, so he was taken to the vessel, where he +could receive the best of care and attention.</p> + +<p>In order not to be out of touch with the sea, John +decided to follow the hills along the eastern side of +the island, and this course was selected because the +people to which they were going, unlike those at the +southern portion of the island, lived in the mountainous +region, as heretofore stated, and the probability +of meeting them would be much better than if +they had followed the level plateau.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 346px;"> +<a id="illus-132" name="illus-132" /> +<a href="#p_130"> +<img src="images/illus-132-fig10.png" width="346" height="211" +alt="Fig. 10. Cinnamon" title="Fig. 10. Cinnamon" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 10. <span class="u">Cinnamon</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>In the march the boys, as well as John, were ever +on the alert to discover the possibilities of the island, +so far as the natural products were concerned.</p> + +<p>"Something smells awfully sweet around here," +said George, as they were tramping along a beautifully-wooded +crest.</p> + +<p>"I think it must come from the trees that have the +beautiful pale blue flowers. Wait until I get a +branch."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_130" id="p_130" href="#p_130">p. 130</a></span></p> + +<p>One of the men was quick to carry out Harry's +wish. John was immensely pleased at the interest +which the boys exhibited. "What does it smell like?" +he inquired.</p> + +<p>"Something like cloves and cinnamon, both," answered +George.</p> + +<p>"Peel off the bark and taste it."</p> + +<p>"It is just like cinnamon."</p> + +<p>"That is correct. It is the real cinnamon tree. +It is the cassia of the Bible, one of the spices so frequently +referred to in Scripture. The bark only is +used, but the species which have fruit, are gathered +and oil expressed from them, which is called <i>cinnamon +suet</i>."</p> + +<p>Advancing, the surface became more rugged. +They had to cross numerous gullies, and broken portions, +and frequently jagged rocks would show themselves. +Evidently when the island was raised up +from the sea the rocks were forced through, and the +climate in time disintegrated them, and formed a soil.</p> + +<p>"Do you think we shall find any minerals here?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"If we are to judge from our experiences on Wonder +Island, where there is almost exactly the same +formation, we may reasonably expect to find copper +and also iron here."</p> + +<p>"While Harry and I were over at the bluff with +Uraso, we saw something like green drippings, from +the walls."</p> + +<p>"That is, undoubtedly, copper,—that is the sulphate +form, in which it is usually found."</p> + +<p>"I was amused at Laleo (the native guide), who +told Uraso this morning that our mission would be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_131" id="p_131" href="#p_131">p. 131</a></span> +successful, and when he was asked why, answered, +that the first thing they saw was three black birds. +How superstitious these people are."</p> + +<p>"Do you think they are any more so than civilized +people?" answered John. "It is curious how the +number three runs through all their ideas. In certain +parts of England they have a great many omens, +and one of them is that if the traveler, starting on a +journey, meets three magpies, it means success; if +two appears, it is a sign of marriage; and four unexpected +good news."</p> + +<p>"I recall that it is considered lucky for sun to +shine on a bride," added Harry.</p> + +<p>"The other part of that couplet is 'rain on a +corpse,'" remarked John.</p> + +<p>"I never knew it was lucky for the corpse to be +rained on," responded Harry, in a questioning tone.</p> + +<p>John laughed immoderately, as he answered: +"Well, it might not be lucky for the corpse. But +there are numerous lucky and unlucky signs that no +one can account for, prevalent in our own country, +such as putting on stockings wrong side out, and +finding a horseshoe."</p> + +<p>"Of course, they are both fortunate signs," said +George, smiling at the thought.</p> + +<p>"In Scotland, among those who are the most matter +of fact people in the world, signs are very common. +It is a bad omen with them to stumble over a +threshold, or to step over green or red, or to sneeze +while making up a bed."</p> + +<p>"After all, we are not so much ahead of the savages, +are we?" mused George.</p> + +<p>During the march that day there was nothing<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_132" id="p_132" href="#p_132">p. 132</a></span> +specially worthy of note. The animals they met +were few and small, and it did not appear that there +were any which merited mentioning, so the boys +gave up the idea of meeting any adventure in that +line.</p> + +<p>Shortly after four in the afternoon they began +to seek out some good camping place. Laleo informed +Uraso that they had now passed into the territory +claimed by the northern tribe, and the desirability +of caution was necessary.</p> + +<p>A rocky shelter, only a short distance above a running +brook below, was found suitable, and there the +halt was made for the night. Early in the morning +they were awakened by Muro, with the welcome intelligence +that the <i>Pioneer</i> was sighted several miles +to the north, where she lay at anchor.</p> + +<p>At the suggestion of John the boys went to the +headland, a mile to the east, and there hoisted a signal +flag, which was observed by the vessel, and the +return signal given, this being indicated by four +circular sweeps of the flag.</p> + +<p>Waving the flag twice to the right, and twice to +the left indicated that they were to remain there until +further advised.</p> + +<p>After a good breakfast the march was resumed, +leading further to the west to avoid the rugged hills +near the sea. Either Uraso or Muro was constantly +in the lead, always accompanied by one of the men +who, in case of necessity, might be sent back to furnish +John the reports of his observations.</p> + +<p>Before noon the messenger came in with the welcome +information that the first of the natives had +been noticed, not far to the north. Muro, who was in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_133" id="p_133" href="#p_133">p. 133</a></span> +the lead, awaited the arrival of John and the boys.</p> + +<p>Together they went forward, the men remaining +in the camp. A few men could thus move through +the brush with less likelihood of observation, than a +large number, which was the principal reason for +this mode of procedure.</p> + +<p>After another mile of cautious movement, a runner +was sent back with the order to bring all of them +forward. Away in the distance the village was +sighted, George's field glasses now being brought +into play. The huts could be seen plainly along +the mountain side, and scattered about in profusion +amid a plentiful supply of trees.</p> + +<p>In some respects, viewed from a distance, the +scene did not look at all primitive, and were it not +for the crude character of the houses it might have +been taken for a typical modern town or village.</p> + +<p>Only one hut had been passed, thus far. It was +not at all crudely built, and while it had been left to +decay, it showed that the owner had some ideas of +comfort, and an eye to convenience, as it was located +by the side of a spring. On one side of the cottage +was a weed-grown garden, and some fine specimens +of taro as well as wild potatoes were in evidence.</p> + +<p>Earthenware cooking utensils were discovered, +which added to the interest of the place, but no other +furniture was found to show how the people lived. +It might have been deserted for a year or more.</p> + +<p>Ascending the second small hill, they were startled +to find themselves face to face with a half dozen +of the natives, who were frightfully alarmed at the +appearance of the visitors, for they set up a shout +and ran like deer toward the village.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_134" id="p_134" href="#p_134">p. 134</a></span></p> + +<p>John kept on at the head of his force, and while +the commotion in the village, not a half mile distant, +was plainly visible, he did not halt, until he saw a +curious crowd surrounding a short individual, who +stood apart from those around him.</p> + +<p>"That is the Chief," said Laleo. "It is said he +is a terrible man, and unlike all others," thus repeating +what the Chief had told John.</p> + +<p>As he made no attempt to come forward or indicate +what his wishes were, John directed the men +to follow him, fifty feet in his rear, and he went +on until within two hundred feet of the motley crowd, +the people in the meantime making no sign of resistance, +nor did they object to the advance.</p> + +<p>When John stopped, the curious figure, who was +designated as the Chief, moved forward toward John +without a bit of hesitation, and the boys were simply +dumbfounded at his singular appearance, and at the +gait he assumed.</p> + +<p>A word picture of him would not be amiss. He +was a hunchback, with an extraordinary lump on his +back, the arms much too long for his body, and +crooked, distorted legs. The head, however, was +massive, and covered with a heavy beard, which +seemed to grow close up to the eyes, giving him a +fierce appearance, because his head was covered with +a thick coating of long gray, or sandy hair, that +swung around the darker beard, as he shambled +along.</p> + +<p>As he neared John his bright and staring eyes +were the first thing noticed. When he came across +the intervening space, his face was stern, and un<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_135" id="p_135" href="#p_135">p. 135</a></span>forbidding, +but as he neared John it relaxed, and +he began to smile.</p> + +<p>John stepped forward, and extended his hand. "I +am glad to meet you," said John.</p> + +<p>The man looked at John for a moment, and then +tried to mumble something, that the boys could not +understand. After a few attempts he fairly shrieked +out: "How are you?"</p> + +<p>This was certainly a startling thing, because the +voice and the intonation were perfect. John opened +his jacket and brought out a miniature American +flag, which was unrolled, and the moment the strange +being caught sight of it he seized it and pressing it to +his lips, kissed it fervently.</p> + +<p>"I am an American," he finally struggled to utter. +"I am a white man, and you are the first white man +I have seen for fifty years. You are welcome to our +home and village."</p> + +<p>The boys could not credit their senses. How did +this poor specimen of the white race become the +powerful Chief of a tribe of savage cannibals?</p> + +<p>John looked at him for a moment in astonishment, +as he asked: "How long have you been Chief of the +people here?"</p> + +<p>"About forty-five years. They are good people +too."</p> + +<p>"We heard you were cannibals," remarked John.</p> + +<p>For a moment he scowled, and then his face brightened +up. "Yes; I know my neighbors to the south +have always believed that to be so, but they have +heard such tales from their witch doctors, such as we +used to have, but it is not true."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_136" id="p_136" href="#p_136">p. 136</a></span></p> + +<p>"You mean the Korinos?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, those who left you two days ago, and have +come to me for protection," and he smiled as he said +this.</p> + +<p>"I tried to get them, but they eluded us," added +John, by way of information.</p> + +<p>"You must pardon me, but it is still a little difficult +for me to form sentences. It is so long since I +have talked to any one in my native tongue. But +I am impolite. Bring your people into the village, +and let us entertain you. I do so want to hear about +the great world and what it is now like."</p> + +<p>The Chief turned to his people and told them that +the White Chief was from his own tribe, and that he +came from a far-away country, on a visit to him, and +that they must treat the people as his own.</p> + +<p>Nothing more was needed to make them welcome. +George suggested to John that Stut on the <i>Pioneer</i> +should be notified, but before they had time to carry +out the order a number of the villagers came rushing +through the village and sought out the Chief.</p> + +<p>The latter turned to John and said: "My people +tell me that there is a large ship here."</p> + +<p>"It is the vessel we came in," answered John, +"and we were about to send a messenger to tell them +to anchor near the village."</p> + +<p>"I am so happy to know this," said the Chief. "I +want to see the ship, because it is the first time that +any one has stopped at our shores. Some years ago +we found some strange things that floated ashore +from a wrecked vessel, and I want to show them to +you, because I cannot understand what some of the +things could be used for."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_137" id="p_137" href="#p_137">p. 137</a></span></p> + +<p>They were led through the principal street of the +town. It was clean and well kept; the huts were far +better than those in the village they had left, and the +natives were, apparently, happy and contented.</p> + +<p>As they marched along George was the first to notice +a tall individual, who, with several others, were +edging away from the visitors.</p> + +<p>"There they are!" he cried out. John turned to +inquire, when Harry commenced laughing, as he +added: "Here are the Korinos, John!"</p> + +<p>The latter looked in the direction indicated, and +laughed when he saw their discomfiture. The Chief +was hurriedly informed of the situation, and he +laughed heartily, as he ordered one of his men to +bring in the fugitives.</p> + +<p>They were ushered in, and Uraso told them that +they were friends and not enemies, and that the +White Chief tried to secure them so that their own +Chief would not harm them. It was a great relief, +unquestionably, and their actions showed it. John +then told them, that he wanted to have a talk with +them, and that he would assure them of their safety.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_138" id="p_138" href="#p_138">p. 138</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>The</span> White Chief's house was built on a plan +which was a vast improvement over anything found +on the two islands. True, it was nothing but an assemblage +of rooms, which surrounded an open court. +The furnishings were crude, but it was evident that +all the articles were such as had been taken from +the wreckages on the shore.</p> + +<p>Goods not native made, were noticed, and even a +photograph, on a tin plate, like the old style daguerreotypes, +was observed by Harry. Three chairs, one +with a broken rocker, formed part of the furnishings +in the court. In one corner was a mass of articles, +the case of a ship's chronometer, the horn of a phonograph, +some tin tubes of different lengths, and other +odds and ends, which could not be recognized.</p> + +<p>"I am anxious to hear your story," said John. +"If you have no objection we should be glad to have +you relate it."</p> + +<p>"It will give me pleasure to tell of my experiences, +although it may not interest you; but before doing +so you must partake of food, because I know what +it means to travel through our country. Besides I +have ordered it prepared, and it is now ready."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 385px;"> +<a id="illus-142" name="illus-142" /> +<a href="#p_122"> +<img src="images/illus-142.gif" width="385" height="572" +alt=""'It is copper,' said John"" +title=""'It is copper,' said John"" /> +</a> +<span class="caption">"<i>'It is copper,' said John</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_122">See p. 122</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p>"These two men I have with me," said John, +pointing to Uraso and Muro, "are Chiefs of two<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_139" id="p_139" href="#p_139">p. 139</a></span> +powerful tribes, who live on a neighboring island, +and they are real friends I found there when these +two boys and I were shipwrecked there several years +ago."</p> + +<p>"I am, indeed, glad to welcome them. I see that +they have adopted the white man's clothing."</p> + +<p>"Yes; and their people who are wonderfully interesting +are engaged in farming, and manufacturing."</p> + +<p>Then John told him briefly the history of their +experiences, and how the people on Wonder Island +were working out their salvation.</p> + +<p>John's tale impressed him most forcefully. "You +have made good use of your talents. Unfortunately, +for me, and for the natives here, I was not able +wholly to bring out the people from their low condition, +as you will be able to understand more fully +when the story is told." He said this sorrowfully, +and with apparent regret.</p> + +<p>After the meal, he continued his narrative: "I +was a poor boy, a native of the State of Massachusetts, +and was bound to a whaler as a helper, when +less than fifteen years of age. It was a hard life, +as you may know. I had no education, and I learned +the life of misery and sorrow when I should have +been at school.</p> + +<p>"But during that and the second year I became +hardened, and my unfortunate physical condition +made me the butt of my companions, and one day, +in a fit of resentment, I struck down one of my +tormentors, while in the harbor of Bedford, after +which I escaped and made my way to Boston.</p> + +<p>"There, the next day, I found employment on an<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_140" id="p_140" href="#p_140">p. 140</a></span> +outgoing ship, that was in the China service, and two +days later, I was gratified to learn that it would sail +that night. I had a much easier berth, and now I +found that among those men I was considered better +than a mere brute, and I became acquainted with +a young man who taught me to read.</p> + +<p>"This was such a delight to me that I could hardly +wait until my daily duties were over, before the +books were brought out, and by the time we put into +Shanghai, I could read and write, as well as perform +many examples in arithmetic.</p> + +<p>"I knew nothing of geography, or of any other of +the necessary parts of education. Our outward trip +was unexciting, but on the first return trip, we met +one of the dangerous monsoons, and the ship was +wrecked. One of my shipmates was the sole occupant +of a spar, and he aided me in my attempt to +grasp it, and together we floated about the great sea +for several days, without a thing to eat or to drink, +until I lost consciousness, and knew no more until I +opened my eyes, and saw the vilest looking savages +standing about me.</p> + +<p>"When I saw them they appeared like a horrid +dream. I had read in one of the books about the +terrible visions that men dream of, and when they +tried to make me eat something, I began to feel that +it was a reality.</p> + +<p>"But the men were naked, and I saw the bones +of human beings about me, and everything had the +appearance of a feast. I soon saw that they were +cannibals, and as I had heard of their practices their +faces grew more and more repulsive to me.</p> + +<p>"I recovered slowly, and now began the terror in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_141" id="p_141" href="#p_141">p. 141</a></span> +my mind. Each day I expected would be my last. +But day after day passed by, and I soon began to +become reconciled to my fate. An incident soon +changed the entire aspect of affairs for me. I had +been treated with the utmost deference. I was furnished +with an abundance of food, but I had previously +learned that it was the custom of those people +to fatten their victims, and this was not welcome +knowledge.</p> + +<p>"I became desperate. One day, while they were +bringing me the finest roasts, I rebelled, and taking a +club, scattered the food, swinging the club at them +and shouting defiance, because human nature began +to rebel, and I could not stand the suspense any +longer.</p> + +<p>"To my surprise they scattered, and fell on their +faces. Among them was the head man, whom I had +always regarded as the Chief. Finally he came up +timidly, and fell on his knees before me. I was so +astounded that I did not know what to do. I went to +the Chief and raised him up, because I was in a +quandary, and could not understand them.</p> + +<p>"This seemed to reassure him, and he told me to +follow him. I had been here long enough to understand +most of their jargon. I was surprised when +he led me to his own hut, and brought out his daughter, +who knelt before me. Then I began to understand. +I was no longer the expected victim, but the +prospective son-in-law. This was better than anticipating +death daily.</p> + +<p>"I accepted the situation. The daughter became +my wife. It was she who welcomed you when we +came in. When her father died I became Chief, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_142" id="p_142" href="#p_142">p. 142</a></span> +long before his death, I controlled the people, as I +knew so much more, and had superior wisdom, +judged by their standard, that they obeyed me in +everything.</p> + +<p>"But much as I abhorred, and tried to prevent it, +as I did on many occasions, they practiced their rites, +and had their Korinos, the real offenders, who taught +them the necessity of sacrifices.</p> + +<p>"But when I became Chief, I sternly refused to +permit them to kill their captives, and cannibalism +was practiced only by stealth. I succeeded in stamping +out the practice only by putting the Korinos to +death, and in shutting up their caves."</p> + +<p>The boys, as well as John were riveted to their +seats during this entire recital, until he referred to +the caves, when they relaxed, and indicated their +pleasure and anxiety. That meant still further +quests in that direction.</p> + +<p>The Chief noticed their movement, and continued: +"I am tiring you, but permit me to add only a few +things. I have endeavored to better the condition +of these people, and have succeeded. To the south +of us was a powerful tribe. My first care was to +make ourselves secure against them.</p> + +<p>"Like my people they, too, were cannibals. They +were ruled over by a Chief who was cruel, and whenever +any of their people escaped I took them in and +cared for them, and there are now many of those +living with us who could not be induced to go back. +For more than forty years no one has been killed +and eaten by my people."</p> + +<p>"Your work here is certainly most commendable. +There is nothing which needs apology. Under the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_143" id="p_143" href="#p_143">p. 143</a></span> +circumstances you have done all that was possible, +and to the best of your ability. No one can do +more," was John's timely observation.</p> + +<p>"I thank you for the compliment. I owe everything +to the few books which my comrade taught me +to read. When I left the United States my heart was +bitter toward all mankind. I could not see why I +should have been treated in such a harsh manner +among civilized people, but when I landed here and +saw how much worse the conditions were, I began +to reflect. It would have been an easy and a natural +thing for me to be brutal to others, as they had been +to me."</p> + +<p>"You have shown a noble spirit, and I shall try +to help you in caring for your people. Our ship is +here, and we have some things for you, as soon as +they can be unloaded," rejoined John.</p> + +<p>During the afternoon communication was established +with the <i>Pioneer</i>, and the natives were willing +helpers in bringing up the packages, but it was too +late to distribute them. Before leaving John said: +"You have not told us your name."</p> + +<p>"I was christened Ephraim Wilmar."</p> + +<p>John seized him by the hands, as he said: "And +was your father's name William?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Ephraim, as his great eyes grew still +bigger. "Did you know him?"</p> + +<p>"I knew him well; he died about thirty years ago. +He was my father's friend."</p> + +<p>This information established a bond of friendship +between the two.</p> + +<p>"I have forgotten to take note of time, and I may +be out a year or two in my reckoning," continued<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_144" id="p_144" href="#p_144">p. 144</a></span> +Ephraim, "but according to the best information I +have this must be the year 1911."</p> + +<p>"You are short one year; it is now 1912."</p> + +<p>"Then let me see! We sailed from China in +January, 1860; and during that same month the ship +went down. From that time to the present I have +no idea of what has taken place."</p> + +<p>"Then you know nothing of the four years' war +between the North and the South?"</p> + +<p>"No; I remember there was some trouble about +the slaves, or something of that sort before we left +China."</p> + +<p>"But there are no more slaves in the United +States."</p> + +<p>"You surprise me! Then they were freed by the +war?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and Cuba is also free, and is now a republic, +and the Hawaiian Islands belong to the United +States, as also do the Philippines."</p> + +<p>"That does not seem possible. Why, if I remember +correctly Cuba and the Philippines belonged to +Spain. When did the United States purchase +them?"</p> + +<p>"We had a war with Spain, and we took the Spanish +possessions, as well as Porto Rico. Manila was +captured three days after war was declared."</p> + +<p>"Three days after war was declared! How could +our fleet, which must have been half the way around +the world, get the news that war had been declared +in that time?"</p> + +<p>"The commander of our fleet at Hongkong, was +notified by telegraph."</p> + +<p>"How could that be done without a telegraph line?<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_145" id="p_145" href="#p_145">p. 145</a></span> +Over what part of the earth are the lines now running?"</p> + +<p>"Everywhere; but there are many running under +the sea and are called <i>cable lines</i>."</p> + +<p>Ephraim looked at John for a moment, as though +he doubted the meaning of the words just uttered, +and then slowly inquired: "That must be a remarkable +thing. I do not see how it would be possible to +string wires under the sea."</p> + +<p>"They are encased in water tight coverings, and +some of the lines are four thousand miles long. But +nowadays we do not need wires for telegraphing."</p> + +<p>The deformed figure arose, and appeared to be +agitated, as he said: "Do you mean to say that +messages can be sent without wires?"</p> + +<p>"Stations for that purpose are now in operation +all over the world."</p> + +<p>"That is as improbable to me as though you should +tell me that it would be possible to talk over a wire," +he answered.</p> + +<p>"But we do talk over wires, and it is possible to +talk over distances hundreds of miles apart, without +wires even."</p> + +<p>He glanced at those about him, and shook his head. +He appeared to hesitate about asking any more questions, +and after shambling back and forth a dozen +times, or more, he stopped at the pile of debris, and +picked up a thick disk-like piece of metal, to one side +of which was a short broken tube attached.</p> + +<p>"I have examined this many, many times. Perhaps +you can tell me what it is?" and he handed it +to John.</p> + +<p>"This is the disk of a phonograph."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_146" id="p_146" href="#p_146">p. 146</a></span></p> + +<p>"What is that?"</p> + +<p>"An instrument which will reproduce the human +voice, or any noise, or the sound of music."</p> + +<p>"I do not understand what you mean. If I talk +to it will it talk back to me?"</p> + +<p>"No; it is so arranged that one form of the instrument +receives the sound of your voice, and impresses +it on material in the form of a cylinder, or a +disk, and if this cylinder or disk is put into another +instrument, this little apparatus, which I hold in my +hand will speak the same words you uttered."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 301px;"> +<a id="illus-152" name="illus-152" /> +<a href="#p_145"> +<img src="images/illus-152-fig11.png" width="301" height="180" +alt="Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk" title="Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 11. <span class="u">Phonograph</span> <span class="u">Disk</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Then electricity must be a wonderful thing, to be +able to be used by men to talk to each other all over +the world, and even to preserve what they say."</p> + +<p>"But the phonograph is not an electrical apparatus. +The disk, here, with the little stylus, or pointer +on it, vibrates and gives forth the sound."</p> + +<p>"All this is most marvelous, and I would like to see +some of those wonderful things," he exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"If you will come to the ship we will show you +many of the things that electricity does, as we have +a phonograph there, and we have a search light that<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_147" id="p_147" href="#p_147">p. 147</a></span> +operates by electricity, and which enables us to see +many miles," added Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes; I must see your ship, and I am ready to accompany +you any time, and I want my people to see +those things, as well."</p> + +<p>"But there are many other things that we now do +with electricity. All street railways are now operated +by it; many boats are run by that power; cooking +is done by it, and its uses extend into almost +everything that man touches," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"If this one branch of knowledge has improved so +wonderfully within a space of fifty years, the progress +in other directions must be very wonderful, +indeed," he responded. "But you have told me so +much, and I hardly know how I can grasp its meaning. +I suppose things here in this part of the world +must appear very crude to you?"</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_148" id="p_148" href="#p_148">p. 148</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>THE CHIEF'S FAMILY</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>Ephraim's</span> wife was not crude and uncouth, like +most of the native women. It was evident from the +care which she observed in the domestic arrangements, +that Ephraim had a hand in shaping her +course.</p> + +<p>The food was served with considerable care, and, +in some degree with the formality observed in civilized +homes. John was a careful observer of customs, +and he was surprised to note that all the natives +patterned after the habits established by their +Chief.</p> + +<p>"I tried," said Ephraim, in answer to John's +questions, "to better their condition, and to teach +them how to prepare and eat their food, and we +made vessels of pottery, which you will notice are +found everywhere. They understood the art of +weaving, in a very primitive way, which I also tried +to improve. Only on three occasions did we take +any toll from the sea, when the wreckage came +ashore.</p> + +<p>"Of the articles which were thus recovered, I +took only a fair share, and the others were impartially +distributed to the people."</p> + +<p>"Did you ever have any trouble with the natives, +or did they ever dispute your authority?" asked +John.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_149" id="p_149" href="#p_149">p. 149</a></span></p> + +<p>"Only once, many years ago. A man claiming to +be the son of the Chief, gathered together a number +of adherents, but my people rose against them, and +killed the leaders, which I very much regretted. +When I remonstrated with them for the severity of +their course, they justified it by saying that I had +been kind to them, and had made them better, and +it was the very thing that taught me to feel that +human beings, although savages, understand kind +treatment. It made me a convert in my feelings +against some of the white men who had treated me +with such severity."</p> + +<p>During the day, after the packages had been removed +from the ship the articles were taken from the +packages and arranged in Ephraim's home. Articles +of clothing were distributed to the Chief's family, +and what pleased him more than anything else, +were the cooking utensils, all of the newest ware, +and in great variety, some of which were curiosities +to him.</p> + +<p>He had four children, the eldest a young man about +thirty years of age, who had a family of three children; +the next, a strong, active native, about twenty-five; +a medium-sized young woman, almost white, of +about twenty, and the youngest a lad of seventeen, +who was quickly attracted to the boys.</p> + +<p>These, together with their mother, undertook the +task of distributing the gifts to the people. Articles +of adornment were, of course, the most enticing to +the natives, and John had anticipated this feeling +in the selection of the gifts.</p> + +<p>After the feast of the good things, John broached +the subject next to his heart, and that was to explore<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_150" id="p_150" href="#p_150">p. 150</a></span> +the island, and particularly the caves. In referring +to the matter he said:</p> + +<p>"I recognize that whatever treasure we may find +in them belongs to you, and you are entitled to +them."</p> + +<p>"But they are of no use to us," he responded. "I +am not wise in the ways of the world, but I am sure +that great wealth, in the way of gold and silver, +would not make my people happy. I agree with you +that employment, and trying to teach people to help +and care for each other, is much more likely to make +them happy, and besides, the treasures which you +refer to could not be used by them to any advantage."</p> + +<p>"You have spoken wisely," answered John, +"nevertheless, we have no need of the riches which +we may find. My search is for a different sort of +wealth."</p> + +<p>"I do not understand what could be of more advantage, +or repay you better than gold and silver."</p> + +<p>"It is believed that many of these places contain +the records of people who have lived here thousands +of years ago. All over the world hidden treasures +of that kind have been found, some of them which +go to show that men lived on the earth hundreds +of thousands of years."</p> + +<p>"You are much wiser than I am, and understand +the reason for making such a search, but I do not see +why that would be of any use to know those things."</p> + +<p>"A great man once said, 'Know thyself,' and another +remarked, that the 'proper study of mankind +is man.' To ascertain the origin of humanity, how +man lived and acted, what were his motives and desires, +his beliefs and his aspirations, and to know<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_151" id="p_151" href="#p_151">p. 151</a></span> +how he has improved, are interesting questions to +me."</p> + +<p>He mused at this statement for a long time, and +then quietly said: "That may be so; it may make +us greater and better men, and it may be gratifying +to have that knowledge, but I have now arrived at +that time of life where things appear differently from +the way I used to look at them. Every year I begin +to think less of myself, and more of those about me.</p> + +<p>"When my children grew up about me they were +the only ones I cared for. They were the only things +in the world that interested me. When my grandchildren +came they were new inspirations to me, +and my views toward others changed, and made me +feel better inclined."</p> + +<p>"That shows, does it not, that as we grow older, +and as the world increases in age, everything improves, +our minds, the advancements in the arts, +in the sciences, in inventions, and generally in the +improvement of the human race? It is a part of the +whole education which man in his improved condition +is trying to instill, and it is human knowledge, +and the desire to learn everything, that gives a stimulus +to us."</p> + +<p>There was no more welcome intelligence than the +news that on the following day they would visit the +first cave in the northern hills, and that Ephraim +would accompany them. The people in the village +were delighted at the news that the ancient caves of +the Korinos would be opened.</p> + +<p>The trip took on the nature of a pleasure expedition. +Even the family of the Chief were insistent on +going along, and the boys quickly became the friends<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_152" id="p_152" href="#p_152">p. 152</a></span> +of Camma, the youngest son of Ephraim, and insisted +that he should go back with them to Wonder Island +on a visit when they returned.</p> + +<p>Ephraim assented to this most heartily. They +showed Camma the workings of the revolver, and +presented him with one of them. Then, when they +went to the ship, he was presented with a camera, +and an outfit for developing.</p> + +<p>When the boys brought back a small hand sewing +machine, and gave it to Mene, young Camma's sister, +the joy in that family was beyond all bounds. Ephraim +stood before the little machine, as though paralyzed. +It acted like a human being, only more perfectly, +as its work showed.</p> + +<p>But now for the caves. Sufficient food was taken +along to make the trip a comfortable one. The village +in which Ephraim lived was nearly a half day's +journey from the original site of the town that was +occupied by the old Chief. He had founded the new +site, near the sea, because of the exposed condition +of the old village, and also on account of the unsanitary +condition of the surroundings.</p> + +<p>The caves were near the old town, and it required +nearly five hours to make the trip, but it was enjoyable, +every step of the way. The three boys engaged +in hunting, on the way, because the new toy +in Camma's hands had to be put to use. Ephraim +put no restraint on the jolly pranks of the boys. +John was careful to tell him that Harry and George +were not wild or reckless, and that Camma would find +them healthy comrades.</p> + +<p>Shortly after noon, they were told that the first +of the caves would be found in the hill toward the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_153" id="p_153" href="#p_153">p. 153</a></span> +right, and that the work of opening the principal +one would not be undertaken until after luncheon.</p> + +<p>You may be sure that the boys made a hurried +meal, and without waiting for the workers to come +up, they grasped their weapons, and were soon half +way up the hill, their guide, an old man, who knew +the location of the caves, being with them, to show +the way.</p> + +<p>The old man pointed to the rocky wall, and indicated +where the opening was. Ephraim had closed +it effectually, for they saw the evidence of the wall +before them, where its comparatively smooth surface +showed the difference between the natural wall +and the rough rocks elsewhere.</p> + +<p>"Where is the other cave?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"It is on the other side," he answered.</p> + +<p>"And is that also closed?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; just as you see this."</p> + +<p>When the workers came up John directed them +how to commence at the top, and take out a rock at a +time. He smiled as he saw how well the work had +been done, and Ephraim was gratified at the praise +bestowed.</p> + +<p>"You certainly made a first class job of ashlar +work," remarked John.</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked Ephraim, in surprise.</p> + +<p>"It is just this kind of masonry where the courses +are irregular, and built up from the rock just as it +came from the quarry."</p> + +<p>"I was not aware that there were different kinds +of masonry. I thought that masonry was merely the +placing together of stones so they would bind each +other, and that is the way I had them do it."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_154" id="p_154" href="#p_154">p. 154</a></span></p> + +<p>"Masonry is one of the oldest of the arts. It is +really the foundation stone of architecture. The +work you have done here happens to be of rock that +has a rather smooth outline, that is, the stone broke +off smooth, in the upper layers, but the large pieces +near the bottom represent what is called rubble +work."</p> + +<p>"This is very interesting to know," remarked +Ephraim.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 355px;"> +<a id="illus-159" name="illus-159" /> +<a href="#p_153"> +<img src="images/illus-159-fig12.png" width="355" height="355" +alt="Fig. 12. Types of Masonry" title="Fig. 12. Types of Masonry" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 12. <span class="u">Types</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Masonry</span>.</span> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;"> +<a id="illus-160" name="illus-160" /> +<a href="#p_153"> +<img src="images/illus-160.png" width="380" height="573" + alt="The old man pointed to the rocky wall" title="The old man pointed to the rocky wall" /> +</a> +<span class="caption">"<i>The old man pointed to the rocky wall</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_153">See p. 153</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p>"I might add," continued John, "that when the +courses are not regular it is called <i>broken</i> ashlar; +when stones of less than one foot in breadth are used<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_155" id="p_155" href="#p_155">p. 155</a></span> +it is called <i>small</i> ashlar; if the wall is backed by +rubble, or inferior work it is called <i>bastard</i> ashlar. +Then every kind of surface has a particular name, +like the <i>random-tooled</i>, where the tool marks are +shown in all directions; <i>rusticated</i> when only the +joined edges are trimmed up; <i>prison-rustic</i> when it +is pitted with deep holes; <i>herring-bone</i> when it +is tooled in rows of opposite directions to each other; +and <i>nigged</i> when finished up with a pointed hammer."</p> + +<p>Within an hour the stones were removed and put +aside, and then Ephraim was treated to another surprise +when he was made acquainted with the little +electric flash lights which John exhibited. With +these they entered the cave.</p> + +<p>All savage tribes have some sort of animals, as +pets, and dogs are the most frequent. This was the +case among these people. The dogs were with the +party, and, as usual, ahead of the procession. Two +of them went ahead on a scouting expedition, while +John and the boys, with their flash lights followed.</p> + +<p>After they had gone, probably two hundred feet, +there was a slight descent apparent in the floor of the +cave, and ahead were the two dogs stretched out, lifeless.</p> + +<p>George ran ahead, as he noticed them, and John +shouted out: "Do not touch them!"</p> + +<p>He stopped, and looked back, and then slowly +walked up to the animals. John requested the party +to halt, and he went forward, and put his foot on one +of the dogs. "We must go back," he said.</p> + +<p>"Are they dead?" asked Harry, as he came forward.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_156" id="p_156" href="#p_156">p. 156</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why not take them out and see what the trouble +is?" inquired Harry.</p> + +<p>"No need for that," responded John. "I know +what the trouble is."</p> + +<p>"Is there any danger in the cave?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>Ephraim and the natives were now alarmed. It +will be remembered that the universal belief among +the natives is, that to go into these caves unbidden, +means death. True, John had shown the fallacy of +this on several occasions, but here was positive evidence +that death had visited the dogs, and this might +be the fate of those who attempted to go on.</p> + +<p>But the most alarming thing was the fact that John +himself was the one who said there was danger, and +that they must return. He did not venture to make +an explanation until they were out of the cave.</p> + +<p>"There is carbonic acid in the cave, and as it is a +deadly poison we cannot go in until it is removed."</p> + +<p>"That seems singular," responded George. "I +went in as far as the dogs, and it didn't affect +me."</p> + +<p>"But you did not reach down to touch the dog."</p> + +<p>"I saw you touch the dog, and it didn't seem to +affect you."</p> + +<p>"I touched it with my feet and not with my hands."</p> + +<p>"I cannot see what difference that makes."</p> + +<p>"If you had touched the dog with your hands it +would have brought your face down near the floor of +the cave, and the gas is at the bottom of the cave +only."</p> + +<p>"Why should it be there and not all over?"</p> + +<p>"Because it is much heavier than the air we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_157" id="p_157" href="#p_157">p. 157</a></span> +breathe, and remains at the bottom, just like water. +If you recall, this part is lower than the corridor +through which we came, so that it could not run out. +I have always observed that in all the other caves +the floors within were higher than the entrance, and +in such cases there is no liability of getting poisonous +gases."</p> + +<p>"But how are we to make the investigation, under +the circumstances?"</p> + +<p>"We must remove the gas."</p> + +<p>"How can that be done?"</p> + +<p>"Several ways are open; one would be to tap +the floor and drain the gas out, which would be difficult +to do with our resources. Another plan would +be to force in a lot of air, so as to render the gas inert, +or we might put in enough air to make it burn, and +consume it."</p> + +<p>"Why, will it burn?"</p> + +<p>"Most assuredly; all it needs is enough air; but +I am afraid this plan will not be a very safe one for +us. If the floor of the cave is not at any place more +than four feet below the entrance, we can go about +safely, but in such case we must move about with the +utmost caution, so as not to get too much of the +gas in the system."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid it will be a difficult thing to go in unless +we know absolutely where the low places are, or +unless we survey the bottom of the cave," said +George, brightening up at the idea.</p> + +<p>"What would happen if we threw a light into the +bottom where the gas is?"</p> + +<p>"It would be extinguished instantly," remarked +John.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_158" id="p_158" href="#p_158">p. 158</a></span></p> + +<p>"That gives me an idea," asserted George. +"Why not take a lamp, and carry it ahead of us, +about three feet from the ground, and whenever that +goes out, it will show there is gas there?"</p> + +<p>"That is a good observation; but I am afraid it +would be very dangerous to do that."</p> + +<p>"Dangerous? I thought you said that the carbonic +gas would put out the light?"</p> + +<p>"So it will; but if three parts of air should be +added to one part of the gas it will make an explosive +mixture,—that is, a mixture which will burn, +as there has been enough oxygen added to support +combustion."</p> + +<p>"In what way could enough air mix with the gas +to make it burn?"</p> + +<p>"By stirring it; the movement of the body might +make an admixture just above the surface of the +gas, which would burn, and that might mean a catastrophe +for us."</p> + +<p>"Then we are certainly stopped at this cave."</p> + +<p>"Not by any means," rejoined John, and he saw +the boys' faces smiling again. "We must make a +safety lamp."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean a lamp that will not explode the +gas, although it has enough oxygen to 'support combustion,' +as you say?"</p> + +<p>"Exactly. Have you ever heard of the Humphrey +Davy lamp? Well, that was invented to meet +the very condition found here."</p> + +<p>"Tell us about it."</p> + +<p>"In 1816 Davy discovered that a flame would not +pass through a fine wire gauze, while conducting +some experiments. It occurred to him that use<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_159" id="p_159" href="#p_159">p. 159</a></span> +could be made of this discovery by surrounding the +flame of a lamp with gauze, and the well-known lamp +was built on that principle."</p> + +<p>"What I am curious to know is, that if it will not +burn the gas, will it go out if it gets down in the +gas?"</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 365px;"> +<a id="illus-166" name="illus-166" /> +<a href="#p_158"> +<img src="images/illus-166-fig13.png" width="365" height="297" +alt="Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps" title="Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 13. <span class="u">Types</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Safety</span> <span class="u">Lamps</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Yes; because enough air, or oxygen must go +through the mesh to support combustion of the flame +itself. If it does not get enough it is smothered."</p> + +<p>"Then why not make a lamp of that kind?"</p> + +<p>"But where can we get enough gauze to make a +cylinder big enough to go around a lamp?"</p> + +<p>John laughed at the serious predicament, which +expressed itself in the faces of the boys. "That is +true," he said; "but if we can get a small piece of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_160" id="p_160" href="#p_160">p. 160</a></span> +tin, we can punch it full of fine holes, and probably +make that answer."</p> + +<p>"We haven't anything in the way of tin large +enough to go around a lamp, but here is a round piece, +about three inches in diameter."</p> + +<p>"That will answer; punch that as full of holes as +possible, and be sure they are very small."</p> + +<p>"What shall we use for a lamp?"</p> + +<p>John was already looking around, and soon spied +a tree in the distance that looked like a small pine, +and beneath that he found some cones, a dozen of +which were picked up.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 365px;"> +<a id="illus-167" name="illus-167" /> +<a href="#p_161"> +<img src="images/illus-167-fig14.png" width="365" height="233" +alt="Fig 14. How John made the Lamp" title="Fig 14. How John made the Lamp" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig 14. <span class="u">How</span> <span class="u">John</span> <span class="u">made</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Lamp</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"That is a pine tree, isn't it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; these cones will burn for some time."</p> + +<p>"But they will not make much of a light."</p> + +<p>"No; but we are not after a light, but they will +do for testing purposes."</p> + +<p>The accompanying sketches show how it was made. +A plate was used for a base, on which the burning<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_161" id="p_161" href="#p_161">p. 161</a></span> +cone was placed. A half dozen twigs were then provided, +and these were bent U-shaped, after being +secured together at their middle portions, and the +lower ends held by a cord, and this was then inverted, +and a piece of thin cotton goods, of a single thickness, +only was wound around the little frame, leaving an +opening at the top, which was covered by the perforated +tin disk.</p> + +<p>"There, now we have an article which provides +for the admission of air, through the cotton goods, +and the product of combustion can escape through +the perforated opening at the top."</p> + +<p>The boys danced around with joy, when the cone +was ignited, and a bale, which was simply a string, +attached, so it could be carried conveniently.</p> + +<p>This time they went on, far beyond the place where +the poor dogs lay. Occasionally John would lower +the device, and when it descended too far, the knot +would begin to smoke, and this was explained by the +statement that as it went into the carbon gas, less and +less air was supplied, which caused the flame to die +down.</p> + +<p>The cave was similar to the others, being white +from the lime deposits, but in all their wanderings +they had never seen anything to compare with the +beautiful hangings noted in the interior, particularly +in the chambers, which they passed, one after the +other, four of which were especially admired.</p> + +<p>Ephraim was intensely interested. He never had +taken the trouble to visit any of these caverns, and +was not disposed to take much stock in the many tales +that had been related about the weird interiors.</p> + +<p>"I can now understand," he said, "why the natives<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_162" id="p_162" href="#p_162">p. 162</a></span> +possessed such a fear of them. I have faced many +perilous conditions, during my life here, but I confess +if I had any faith in the superstitions about these +places, they would have paralyzed me, now that I +have seen their ghostly appearance."</p> + +<p>They suddenly emerged into a spacious chamber, +so large that their voices seemed to reverberate. +The flash lights were directed to all sides and to the +immense vaulted and icicle-covered ceiling. John +stood the lamp on the ground. It was free from the +dangerous gas. The floor was fairly level, but it was +covered with the broken hangings from the ceiling.</p> + +<p>"I see an outlet, directly opposite the one we came +by," exclaimed George.</p> + +<p>The party hastened across the intervening space. +They were traveling along the greatest length of the +chamber. Midway between the two openings were +two other side openings, and John stopped and exclaimed: +"It is true! We have found it!"</p> + +<p>The boys had never seen John so agitated before. +They pressed around and requested an explanation, +but he fumbled in his pocket, and soon drew forth a +carefully wrapped piece of brown paper.</p> + +<p>"This is parchment. It contains the sketch of the +cave that has been the object of my search. I believe +we are the only white people who have ever been +privileged to enter it since the chart was made three +centuries ago."</p> + +<p>Ephraim, as well as the boys, glanced about them. +What was there to excite him? Other caves had the +same sort of formation, the chambers and the openings: +and while they wondered John drew a compass<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_163" id="p_163" href="#p_163">p. 163</a></span> +from his pocket, and after holding it for a while, +continued:</p> + +<p>"This chamber runs north and south as you see. +We entered on the south side. It had two other outlets, +one to the east, the other to the west."</p> + +<p>"Then it is the cross-shaped cave!" almost shouted +George.</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered John, as he fixed his eyes on the +boys. "In the year 1620, a Spanish navigator found +a cave, of which this is a description, and within it +were found the remains of hundreds of people."</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_164" id="p_164" href="#p_164">p. 164</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>THE CHART AND THE CAVES</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>John</span> pored over the map, without going any +further. Evidently something was passing in his +mind, for occasionally his eyes left the paper and he +looked about, as though undecided.</p> + +<p>"Do you know any more about what they found?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; there are many incomplete portions belonging +to the history, but it may be summed up by the +statement, that they also found an immense amount +of treasure, much of it in the form of solid gold. +The adventurers were wild with joy at the discovery, +and took steps to remove it.</p> + +<p>"Before proceeding far they found carvings and +inscriptions, the latter of which were unintelligible +to them, but they were very curious, judging from +the few sketches which were made. But like many +men of their class they began to quarrel over the +treasure, and fought each other to the death."</p> + +<p>"That was just like the fellows who lived in the +cave at the Cataract," suggested Harry.</p> + +<p>"No doubt that was over the treasure, too, there, +as well as here. Four of the men escaped, only to +be chased by savages, and after finally reaching their +vessel were almost wrecked because they did not have +enough properly to man the ship.</p> + +<p>"After reaching civilization, they engaged a num<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_165" id="p_165" href="#p_165">p. 165</a></span>ber +of men, and returned. Some went in, among +them two of the original discoverers. They did not +return for some days, and another party went in, +but they did not return.</p> + +<p>"Only one of the four remained, and when their +companions did not return, the others took fright +and returned to the vessel. Juan Guiterez was the +name of the sole survivor of the first expedition. +The adventurers who accompanied him declared that +he and his company had lured them to the strange +isle, in order to destroy them, and on the return to +the first Spanish port, he was cast into prison, and +remained a prisoner for nearly twenty years.</p> + +<p>"This chart, or what remains of it, or from which +this copy was made was written by him while in +prison, but the singular thing is, that while he was +explicit in many things, he did not leave a clue as +to the location of the island. Many of the things on +it, as you see, are very faint."</p> + +<p>The boys now examined the chart for the first time. +Harry started back in surprise, as he pointed to the +chart, and looked up at John. "Why, there are the +same marks we found on the skull at Wonder +Island!" he exclaimed in great excitement.</p> + +<p>"Quite true! and do you now wonder why I have +been so much interested to find the location? Chance +has thrown this opportunity our way. It is true we +might be mistaken, but the description fits."</p> + +<p>It would require pages to tell about what they +found in the recesses of the cavern. Hundreds and +hundreds of skeletons were discovered, and the most +curious tablets and carvings in hieroglyphics were +scattered in the adjoining chamber.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_166" id="p_166" href="#p_166">p. 166</a></span></p> + +<p>Peculiarly-formed tools, implements of warfare, +also of metal, small slabs of uniform size, and with +characters on both sides, which might have been the +historical books of the singular people who lived here +ages ago, were in profusion not only in the large +chamber, but in the most unexpected places.</p> + +<p>To John it was a vast storehouse of archeological +wealth. To the boys it was much more. There were +still some things that John did not explain, and which +they wanted to know.</p> + +<p>"Do you believe that the different parties went in +and never came back again?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt but the account was true."</p> + +<p>"What became of them?"</p> + +<p>"They probably met the fate that almost overtook +us when we first went in," was the answer.</p> + +<p>The parchment was correct in the main details, as +to the records within the cave, but there were no +treasure, nor could any trace be found of them. They +spent several days in the search, but to no avail. +The boys were not much disappointed, it may be said, +but they were gratified to know that John had accomplished +the one desire of his life, and they knew, +also, that it would be a source of great joy to the +Professor.</p> + +<p>It was found that the cave entrance at the opposite +side of the hill was the northern outlet to the +same set of caverns, and Ephraim did not know of +any others that existed in the northern part, so that +they did not feel it to be desirable to take up more +time in this direction.</p> + +<p>They had now found two isles, besides their own +loved island, and when they assembled that evening<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_167" id="p_167" href="#p_167">p. 167</a></span> +in the cabin of the <i>Pioneer</i>, they had a most earnest +conversation as to the results of their latest enterprise.</p> + +<p>"We have sought the treasures of the islands, and +what have we accomplished?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"What have we accomplished? I have been thinking +that to find the natives here, and to be able to +help them, is a pretty big thing in itself," answered +Harry.</p> + +<p>"That is true," he responded, "and the same thing +might be said, also, about the wonderful products +of the islands; they are certainly worth coming here +for. I wonder what Blakely would say if he knew +of all there is here, and the knack shown by the natives +to handle the things?"</p> + +<p>"I am in sympathy with your views," said John. +"Treasures, like gold and silver, are worth seeking +for, but when you find that the earth is inviting people +to till it, and there are people who, through ignorance, +do not know how the earth can be utilized, it +is a great privilege to be able to help them, and +the recollection of what you have done will be the +greatest treasure not only to you but to the poor +people that have been benefited."</p> + +<p>"I think Ephraim's story is a wonderful one," +said George, "but he could not go far. His education +was limited, but see what he has done with the +little he knew."</p> + +<p>"It was curious, however, that the cannibals had +fear for him. I cannot understand that," rejoined +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Savages are children only. They have the capacities +of full grown men, but have never had the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_168" id="p_168" href="#p_168">p. 168</a></span> +opportunities. Their superstitions lead them into +singular forms of reasonings. With them the deformed +are objects of curiosity, and generally, of +reverence. Those mentally deficient are regarded as +possessing a superior spirit."</p> + +<p>"I remember that the Professor told us so on one +occasion, but it seems to be singular that they should +get that view. How do you account for it?"</p> + +<p>"That is a trait, or, I may say, a belief which is +not at, all uncommon among civilized people. +Throughout Europe many men, who lived years ago, +are reverenced as Saints, and, who, from the accounts +given of them, were demented. Why, it is even +claimed that there is but one step from the abnormally +gifted to the insane person."</p> + +<p>"Is that really so regarded among learned men?"</p> + +<p>"It has been the subject of many remarkable books +which have been written to show that genius and insanity +are closely allied. Take, for instance, the +case of Blind Tom, an ignorant negro, who, although +he could not read, nor did he know a single note of +music, was able, nevertheless, to play the most marvelous +music, and repeat, at a single hearing, an entire +musical score."</p> + +<p>"But such talents, as that, I have heard, is only in +some particular direction. He was not able to do +anything else," suggested George.</p> + +<p>"Quite true. But it is so with what is called genius. +I once knew a learned minister, a leading professor +in one of the colleges, who was absolutely devoid +of any other phase of education, except theology. +He could not master the first rudiments of mathematics, +and knew no more of astronomy than a ten<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_169" id="p_169" href="#p_169">p. 169</a></span> +year old boy, but he was supreme in his particular +branch of knowledge."</p> + +<p>But the great question with John and the boys +was the future. Two islands had been discovered. +Some of the mysteries of the past three years had +been solved, but others still remained; in fact, those +which interested them the most, were still shrouded +in a veil through which there was only the slightest +glimpse.</p> + +<p>John felt that their first duty would be thoroughly +to explore the island to the north and west of the +village, and thus enable them to make a complete +report when they returned to Wonder Island, and +this course was finally decided upon.</p> + +<p>The spirit of John had now entered Ephraim. He +had fully agreed to accompany them in the <i>Pioneer</i>, +and learn of their great work on that island. He +said that it was his duty to his children and to the +natives who had stood by him so nobly, to provide +for their future welfare.</p> + +<p>He was most active in arousing the people to an +understanding of the mission of John and the boys. +Within a day, all preparations were made for the +journey through the island, and Ephraim was with +them in order to learn all that might be necessary, +so that when he returned he could advise the people.</p> + +<p>For more than a week they tramped through the +attractive portions of the land, and then the day was +set for departure.</p> + +<p>"I have been thinking of making a trip to your +friends in the South," said John, as they were dining +at Ephraim's home, the day before the date of sailing.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_170" id="p_170" href="#p_170">p. 170</a></span></p> + +<p>"That would please me more than anything else," +replied Ephraim. "It occurs to me that is the first +step toward peace and prosperity on the island."</p> + +<p>"Then we shall sail to their village, and from that +place go to Venture Island, where we had our first +adventures, stopping, on the way at Hutoton, where +they have a criminal colony."</p> + +<p>"What is that?" inquired Ephraim. "A criminal +colony?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said John. "On the large island to the +south, which we discovered before we came here we +found a singular condition of things. Near the +southern end of the island we came into contact with +a tribe ruled over by a Chief, named Beralsea, a powerful +man; in fact, there is no law there except the +will of the Chief."</p> + +<p>The boys were now laughing immoderately, and +Ephraim was moved to smiles at their mirth. "It +must have been very amusing, I have no doubt," he +said.</p> + +<p>"We were thinking of the jolly time we had when +Sutoto married the Chief's daughter," said George.</p> + +<p>"We shall tell you all about it on our way there," +added Harry.</p> + +<p>"I was about to say," continued John, as he also +smiled at the reminiscence, that his views on theft +were most peculiar. He did not regard it as a crime +if the people stole from each other. But if they attempted +to steal from him, or tried to deceive him, +it was such a great crime, that the unfortunates were +banished to a place called Hutoton, which, as he +stated, meant the Place of Death.</p> + +<p>"We were informed that it was a terrible place,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_171" id="p_171" href="#p_171">p. 171</a></span> +and when a man was sentenced it also meant a like +sentence to all of his family, and that no one was +ever known to return from that horrible prison +home."</p> + +<p>"I have heard, but only vaguely, that there was +such a place, but had no idea that it was so near +to us. But did you verify the character of the +place?"</p> + +<p>"We went there, and instead of finding a barren +and uninviting spot, and misery and want, we saw +a lovely village, and people so much more advanced +than those in the village ruled over by the Chief, that +we were amazed.</p> + +<p>"The ruler there treated us handsomely, and had +even taken care in the most kindly manner, of a white +man who had escaped the rigors of the sea some +years before, and who was demented, or incapable, +through paralysis, of recognizing those around him."</p> + +<p>Ephraim started as John said this. "A white +man, did you say? How old was he? Where is he +now?"</p> + +<p>"We sent him to Wonder Island where the Professor +has taken care of him, no doubt," Harry interjected.</p> + +<p>"You appear agitated. Have I recalled anything +that might give a clue to his identity?" queried John.</p> + +<p>"No; it could not be possible! It was merely a +passing fancy. Strange, how things sometimes will +affect you. No, I do not know that I can add anything +to your knowledge concerning him." The subject +was not again alluded to during that day.</p> + +<p>Ephraim and his family were taken aboard the +<i>Pioneer</i>. Everything was marvelous to them. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_172" id="p_172" href="#p_172">p. 172</a></span> +cabin with its complete furnishings, the musical instruments, +the phonograph, the piano player, which +acted like a wizard, because it gave out the sweet musical +tones, as though it were a living thing, and then +a moving picture screen, which was the last thing the +boys installed before they left New York, made up +a series of entertainments for the family that had no +end of marvels for them.</p> + +<p>"To think of it; for fifty-two years this is the first +time I have paced the decks of a vessel. It is the +happiest day of my life." And Ephraim could +scarcely keep the tears from coming. Happiness +shows itself in that way with the strongest, not with +the weakest. The strong man can stand the miseries +and the sufferings much better and with a +braver front than the weak; but excessive joy will +break him down so that he manifests it more easily.</p> + +<p>John saw his emotion and sympathized with him. +Taking him by the arm he led him to the cabin forward, +and as they entered the cozy library, he pointed +to the books. This was the end of Ephraim for that +day.</p> + +<p>Without leaving the room he moved from case to +case and scanned shelf after shelf, and when John, +on one occasion came in, he heard him mutter: "Is +there another place like this on earth?"</p> + +<p>Late that evening the <i>Pioneer</i> took down part of +its sail as they approached land in the distance.</p> + +<p>"We are nearing Hutoton," shouted George.</p> + +<p>Stut ordered the whistle to blow, and before the +landing was reached the shore was lined with the +people. They soon recognized the visitors, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_173" id="p_173" href="#p_173">p. 173</a></span> +boats were prepared before the anchor finally +dropped.</p> + +<p>The entire crew of the <i>Pioneer</i> went ashore, and +Ephraim was curious to see the head man, and have +a conversation about the manner in which the colony +was conducted.</p> + +<p>The boys could not understand the change of plans. +Why did they not stop at the southern part of the +island, and visit the Malosos, who were supposed to +be Ephraim's enemies?</p> + +<p>It was learned that John and Ephraim, after the +vessel started, concluded it would be wiser to visit +Hutoton first and get all the information possible +from them concerning the time, condition, and circumstances +of the casting ashore of the white man +found there when John and his party made their +visit.</p> + +<p>In explanation of their action, it may be well, also, +to state that they still had on board of the <i>Pioneer</i>, +the white man they had rescued or taken from the +stockade in the Malosos village, and that there were +certain things in his tale that seemed improbable to +John.</p> + +<p>The visit to Hutoton might be able to clear up the +mystery, and possibly establish the identity of the +paralyzed man, and in that event it would, not be +necessary to go directly to the Malosos village but +await their return from Venture Island before visiting +the village.</p> + +<p>While the old man was being taken from the vessel, +George went to John and inquired: "Did he +ever tell you his name?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_174" id="p_174" href="#p_174">p. 174</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, yes; he says it is Henry D. Retlaw."</p> + +<p>All noticed that he stole furtive glances about him +as he was being conveyed to the village.</p> + +<p>"Were you ever here before?" asked John, as they +neared the house of the magistrate.</p> + +<p>He shook his head vigorously, and answered +"No!" with a vehemence that startled John.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_175" id="p_175" href="#p_175">p. 175</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>RESCUE ISLAND</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>Orders</span> had gone out to prepare to receive the visitors +in true Hutoton style, but, in truth, the people +did not need any urging. The remembrance of the +last visit, when the gifts were so judiciously distributed, +was sufficient to assure a generous welcome.</p> + +<p>It was out of the question to leave that night, and +John felt it to be a duty to cultivate their acquaintance, +and confer with the chief magistrate about +starting the people at work gathering the native +products.</p> + +<p>John announced that within a month it was proposed +to establish regular sailings between that port +and Wonder Island, which would enable them to get +supplies and ship their products each week. This +intelligence was then imparted to the people, who +received it with the greatest enthusiasm.</p> + +<p>"One of the objects of the present visit is to take +you with us to Wonder Island," said John, addressing +the leader, "so that you may learn what we are +doing, and come back prepared to instruct your people."</p> + +<p>When this information was conveyed to him, he +cast down his eyes, and said sorrowfully: "But I +am a convict, like the others, and I have been con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_176" id="p_176" href="#p_176">p. 176</a></span>demned +to stay here. If I leave this place I disobey +the law of the Chief."</p> + +<p>John smiled as he replied: "I have provided for +all that. You will meet your Chief Beralsea in +Unity, the Capital of Wonder Island. Hutoton is +no longer the terrible place that the Chief pictured +to us. He told me that your assistance was necessary +to him and to the people in the colony."</p> + +<p>This information was received in gratitude, and +his consent was thus readily obtained.</p> + +<p>After a night of feasting, preparations were made +for the departure. Retlaw was brought to the place +where the paralyzed man was discovered, and the +leader Caramo accompanied them.</p> + +<p>The moment Caramo saw him he turned to John +and said: "I have seen that face before. I am sure +he accompanied another man when on one occasion +a boat load came ashore a long way to the south of +us."</p> + +<p>"How long ago was that?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than three suns ago."</p> + +<p>It must be understood that <i>three</i> suns meant with +these people, three years by our reckoning. When +Retlaw was examined he denied that he had ever +been on the island before, and, of course, there was +no way to discredit his statements. After all, Caramo +might be mistaken in identifying him, as they +were some distance apart at the time the island was +supposed to have been visited by Retlaw.</p> + +<p>At noon of the following day the <i>Pioneer</i> weighed +anchor, and set sail for the southern port of the +northern island, there to visit Chief Ta Babeda, of +the Malolos.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_177" id="p_177" href="#p_177">p. 177</a></span></p> + +<p>While they were skimming the shore south of the +village, George said: "There is one thing we have +neglected. We have had so much to do lately that +we haven't found time for it, but there is an opportunity +now."</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"We have no name for the island to which we are +now going. We might consult Ephraim. It would +be hardly fair to impose any sort of name on his +country," suggested George, with a good humored +laugh.</p> + +<p>Ephraim was delighted at the idea. "We must +have a name, assuredly, but it never occurred to me +before. The natives called it Rescudada; at any +rate that is as near as I can recall the pronunciation +of the word."</p> + +<p>"Why, that is almost like Rescue."</p> + +<p>"Why wouldn't that be a good name?" asked Ephraim. +"There has been considerable rescue work +here, and it is going on all the time."</p> + +<p>"That's the name for it!" exclaimed Harry, enthusiastically.</p> + +<p>"Suppose we notify General John and Skipper +Stut that the Geographical Society has just named +the island 'Rescue'?"</p> + +<p>This important function was attended to and a +note made in the log that the island discovered in +south latitude 41° 37' 10", and west longitude 138° 2' 56", +by the steamship <i>Pioneer</i>, was formally named +<i>Rescue</i>.</p> + +<p>Long before the village was reached the great fog +horn of the <i>Pioneer</i> commenced to give the signal. +The villagers knew what it meant, and the old Chief<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_178" id="p_178" href="#p_178">p. 178</a></span> +himself was at the landing place to welcome the visitors.</p> + +<p>The boats were manned by the sailors, and the +boys, together with John, Ephraim, and Caramo, +were in the first boat. When Ta Babeda gazed at +Ephraim, he was astounded. John had not informed +him of the name of his visitor, but he continued +to gaze at him in amazement.</p> + +<p>It was evident that the old Chief was impressed +with his appearance, so unlike anything he had ever +before known in the form of a human being. When +they arrived at the Chief's house, John awaited the +proper time before making the introductions, and +finally said:</p> + +<p>"It gives me pleasure to introduce to you, the +greatest enemy you have. This is Rumisses, the +Cannibal Chief of the Umbolos."</p> + +<p>The Chief was startled beyond measure. True, +he knew that John and his party had come into contact +with his arch enemy, but this was certainly a +thrilling way to bring them together.</p> + +<p>Ephraim walked forward and seized the Chief by +the hand, and then pressed his nose against him. +This was, of course, symbolic of friendship.</p> + +<p>The Chief unhesitatingly accepted the token, but +he could not remove his eyes. Here was the man, +so unlike all others, and the impression of superiority, +undoubtedly, was also in his mind, but Ephraim +quickly relieved him of his reflections, as he +said:</p> + +<p>"Because I am so unlike you, is not due to any +particular knowledge, or favor from the Great Spirit. +I am a white man, like the Great Chief here, and was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_179" id="p_179" href="#p_179">p. 179</a></span> +unfortunate to be cast among the natives in the north, +and I have tried for many years to prevent the practicing +of the sacrifices, and have succeeded."</p> + +<p>"But we were told that all the people you captured +from us were sacrificed."</p> + +<p>"It is not true. They are all living with us in +perfect happiness and contentment."</p> + +<p>"Then why is it that we have been so much deceived?"</p> + +<p>"Because the Korinos have not told you the truth. +They did this because they knew no better."</p> + +<p>"Yes; the White Chief has told us that they have +deceived us, and I believe him. But I learn that my +Korinos have gone to you for protection!"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and I have shielded them, and they are now +on board of the vessel in the harbor."</p> + +<p>This information brought back all the native resentment +of the old Chief. "Then he has brought +them back to me!" he exclaimed in great earnestness.</p> + +<p>"I believe he intends to do so, but it will not be +until they go to Wonder Island, that marvelous +place."</p> + +<p>"Then I am content."</p> + +<p>John heard the conversation, and soon turned it +into another direction, when he informed the Chief +that the Chief of Venture Island as well as the leader +of the criminal colony, were to accompany them to +Wonder Island, and that the company would be incomplete +without him and his family.</p> + +<p>He looked at his visitors for some time, doubting +in his mind the propriety of such a course, but the +entreaties of Ephraim, and the urging of Muro and +Uraso, were sufficient to decide the question, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_180" id="p_180" href="#p_180">p. 180</a></span> +the only matter that now weighed on his mind was +to determine who should accompany him in this wonderful +voyage.</p> + +<p>Ta Babeda had never summoned up sufficient courage, +while the ship was formerly in port, to board +the vessel. His examination of the <i>Pioneer</i> was +made from the shore. Now he would step into a +new world.</p> + +<p>He little knew what wonders would be exhibited to +him. The ship's band was the greatest thing he +had ever known, and he never tired of its music. +But when he saw the curious piano, the music box +that acted as though it had life, and the other evidences +of civilized arts, that were found in the cabin, +he was content to make the best of it.</p> + +<p>Like all natives, as we have already stated, he +was immoderately fond of eating, and the kitchen +arrangements, where food was cooked without any +fuel, interested him beyond everything else. He +would sit at the entrance of the kitchen for minutes +at a time.</p> + +<p>The push buttons, the snap switches for the electric +lights and for the cooking apparatus, were some +things which he could not understand. The little +innocent wires meant nothing to him, nor could the +boys, or even John, explain the phenomenon to him +so he could understand it.</p> + +<p>The boys puzzled over this, as he was insistent +upon an explanation. What finally happened, the +very thing the boys tried to avoid in every way, came +when he touched the two wires, and formed a short +circuit through his hand.</p> + +<p>He emitted one yell, and bounded out through the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_181" id="p_181" href="#p_181">p. 181</a></span> +door, and it was some time before he could be induced +to make further investigations. His expressions +were very humorous, particularly when he insisted +that the wires were mad, and didn't like him, +and that they tried to pull his arms out of his shoulders.</p> + +<p>Harry then took two of the wires and brought them +together, and then pulled them apart. Each time +this was done, a spark would flash. The object was +to show that two wires were necessary to produce a +circuit or a current.</p> + +<p>Eventually an inspiration seemed to strike him, +as he exclaimed: "They are married! Yes, I see!"</p> + +<p>The boys laughed as they told John of the circumstance, +and how utterly impossible it was to +produce a current until a circuit was established.</p> + +<p>John threw himself back and roared at the recital +of the story, as told by the boys. "I think his description +is a pretty good one. Perhaps he was +thinking of the family circle?" and John continued +to laugh as the boys tried to grasp the full meaning +of his little joke.</p> + +<p>But Ta Babeda was an apt pupil. He was far +more acute than Beralsea, and there scarcely was an +hour but he had one of the boys at his side trying to +fathom some of the mysteries in the new world. +This was in the nature of a picnic for the boys, who +enjoyed his curious questions and his equally unexpected +comments.</p> + +<p>Ephraim, too, was generally present, as well as +Camma, his eldest son, the latter evincing remarkable +knowledge for one who had never known of the +wizardry that resides in wood and stones and iron.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_182" id="p_182" href="#p_182">p. 182</a></span></p> + +<p>To Ephraim this opportunity to open the wide +world to his children must have been a heaven of +delight, and he reveled in every hour and even regretted +that nature demanded sleep. It seemed to +be better awake and seeing and feeling. Two weeks +prior to this he had merely existed; now he was a +man again, and living.</p> + +<p>It was, indeed, a merry party on board of the +noble ship. When the Chief, and those about him +were told that the vessel was the creation of George +and Harry, it was another occasion to marvel +over.</p> + +<p>"Your boys can do the same thing, and make +other things just as wonderful," said John, as they +were commending and petting the boys.</p> + +<p>"Do you think so!" asked Ta Babeda, in great +earnestness, and for the first time showing any curiosity +or indicating any desire to give his children +any advantages.</p> + +<p>John saw that the leaven was working, as he replied: +"That is why I have been so anxious to have +you and your children visit our city. Your wife +and daughters will find as many surprising things to +interest them as the boys will discover."</p> + +<p>The run from Rescue to Wonder Island, would +occupy, ordinarily, about ten hours, of a complete +day, and for that reason the start was made early +in the morning. Unity was about eight miles from +the sea, on a large stream, and it was desirable to +make the run through the river by daylight.</p> + +<p>But shortly before noon a wind sprang up from +the west, and it increased in intensity, so that shortly +after the noon hour they were compelled to make a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_183" id="p_183" href="#p_183">p. 183</a></span> +long tack to the south. This meant a night on board +ship, and a stormy one at that.</p> + +<p>The wide, wide sea, without the sign of any land +in sight was, indeed, a fascinating thing to the natives, +and how they admired the native sailors with +whom they readily fraternized. They watched +every movement, the taking down of the sails, the +changing of the angles of the great sheets, as they +turned in their course, the handling of the tiller, +and all the paraphernalia of sailing, for the <i>Pioneer</i> +depended principally on her sailing capacity, and +not on the small engine with which she was equipped.</p> + +<p>The boys explained to Camma, that upon their return +to the island a much larger engine would be +installed, so that they need not depend upon the +sails thereafter, but would be able then to sail directly +through the wind, instead of being blown back +and forth, as was now the case.</p> + +<p>The wind did not abate until the morning was +breaking, and then there was a welcome change in +the direction that the storm was taking. Many of +the natives were ill, and John had the satisfaction +of administering the new and lately-discovered remedy, +namely, Atropine.</p> + +<p>Shortly after ten o'clock the eastern end of Wonder +Island was sighted. The great mountain range +was visible, and the identical headland, where the +skull with the inscription was found, could be discerned +through the mild haze.</p> + +<p>There was immense curiosity on board the ship as +it skirted along the shore. The Tuolo landing place +was sighted, but they continued past it. Two hours +afterward they could plainly see the dock which had<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_184" id="p_184" href="#p_184">p. 184</a></span> +been built for the use of Uraso's people, and an hour +later Muro was just as much interested to point out +to Ephraim and Ta Babeda the landing station of +his tribe.</p> + +<p>Immediately after luncheon, George, who was always +on the alert, ran through the vessel, with his +field glass in hand, and announced that the <i>Wonder</i>, +the large steamship, which made trips to Chili, was +coming up in the distance, and heading, as they were, +for the mouth of Enterprise River, which flowed past +the city.</p> + +<p>All were intensely excited at the announcement, +and rushed forward to get a glimpse of the great +ship. As she came up the streamers began to fly +from every spar and mast, and Harry ran up to Stut, +and asked why the <i>Pioneer</i> did not have them out.</p> + +<p>"But they are ready and will be flown as soon as +we get nearer." As he said this the first ones were +unfurled. Then the <i>Wonder</i> blew three long blasts +which the <i>Pioneer</i> answered.</p> + +<p>"They are going to let us go in first," said John. +Such was, indeed, the case, for the <i>Wonder</i> slowed +down, and the <i>Pioneer</i> entered the mouth of the +river, for the last eight miles of the eventful cruise.</p> + +<p>Two miles from the town both vessels began to +blow signals with the fog horns, and long before the +wharf was reached the people began to flock from +all sides.</p> + +<p>One little incident pleased the boys beyond all +measure. On the bridge, and furiously waving his +arms, and swinging an American flag was Sutoto, +with his bride by his side.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_185" id="p_185" href="#p_185">p. 185</a></span></p> + +<p>"So Sutoto has been on a wedding trip to Chili?" +remarked Harry.</p> + +<p>Such was the case, as they afterwards learned. +Both boys were busy explaining the sights and the +locations of the different buildings to Beralsea and +Ephraim, and the latter was much affected as he +saw the flag floating from the tall staff in the principal +square of the city.</p> + +<p>Beralsea had seen Sutoto wave the flag from the +bridge of the <i>Wonder</i>, and when he saw the same +sort of emblem on the staff, he inquired of Ephraim +the meaning of the curious thing. It was then explained +to him that it was the magic combination +of colors which their great tribe believed in, and +which was always raised above them wherever they +were, as a symbol that they were protected by it.</p> + +<p>"But how can that protect the people? Is there +something in it like the unseen lightning, which we +have on the ship?"</p> + +<p>"Unseen lightning, is a pretty good name, coming +from a savage," remarked Harry in an undertone.</p> + +<p>"No; not in that way," answered Ephraim, "but +whenever people see it, wherever they may be, they +know that the tribe is great enough to give protection +to any one who may try to injure any member +of our tribe."</p> + +<p>"The White Chief has told me that there are +many islands and countries, and that the world is +round, and is peopled by many different tribes. Do +the people everywhere know that 'flag,' as you call +it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; in every part of the world."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_186" id="p_186" href="#p_186">p. 186</a></span></p> + +<p>"Who are those two men standing there alone?" +asked Ta Babeda.</p> + +<p>"I do not know," responded Ephraim. "This is +the first time I have been here. The boys will +know."</p> + +<p>"That," answered George, "is the Professor,—that +is, the man with a white beard and hair. The +large man by his side is Beralsea, the Chief of the +tribe on Venture Island."</p> + +<p>Ephraim looked at Ta Babeda for a moment, with +an amused smile, and then remarked: "He is almost +as large as you are."</p> + +<p>The <i>Wonder</i> was the first to get her cables to the +dock, and as she swung against the wharf, and the +gang plank was fixed in place, the first ones to spring +ashore were Sutoto and Cinda, the latter of whom +rushed to her father's outstretched arms, and then +to her mother and the other members of the family.</p> + +<p>The boys did not know how or where to extend +the first greetings. There was Sutoto and Lolo, and +the dear old Professor, who considerately kept in the +background, but the boys insisted on giving him the +first greeting.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_187" id="p_187" href="#p_187">p. 187</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>"That</span> was an awfully sly thing to do, as soon as +our backs were turned," said George, as Sutoto and +Cinda were finally free from the vigorous greetings.</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked Cinda.</p> + +<p>"To run away without giving us notice!"</p> + +<p>"But we have seen the great wide world, and it is +wonderful, and I can never tell the people here how +grand it is."</p> + +<p>And then the boys looked at Cinda, and when they +saw the latest fashions displayed, the prettiest gown, +the neatest slippers, and the stunning hat they took +off their caps, and made a neat bow in recognition +of that feminine touch of character which so readily +adapts the sex for acquiring the latest fashions +wherever they may be.</p> + +<p>Every one was wild with excitement. "There is +Blakely!" shouted Harry. "Hurrah! old boy! We +have the place for you to visit, as soon as possible. +The finest island you ever saw, and the people all +ready for business."</p> + +<p>"My hands are full now; we must have another +ship. Look at the <i>Wonder</i>; she is so full of goods +that we are more than eight hours behind time. But +I am arranging for another steamer."</p> + +<p>"Too bad that we are finding more islands than<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_188" id="p_188" href="#p_188">p. 188</a></span> +you can handle," responded George; "I suppose we +shall have to find another manager?"</p> + +<p>"Or several assistants," said Blakely.</p> + +<p>"What are all these men here for?" asked Harry. +"Why the whole island must have come to town."</p> + +<p>"Well, we have had to send for all the spare men +from the different tribes. Fifty of the Tuolos just +came in this morning, and thirty of the Illyas arrived +yesterday, with their families. The <i>Wonder</i> +must be unloaded, and start back again before six +this evening. But what did you find that looks as +good as Venture Island?"</p> + +<p>"Rescue Island; a dandy place, and much bigger +than Venture Island. And what do you think? We +found a chief there who is a white man," remarked +George.</p> + +<p>"A white man? Where is he from?"</p> + +<p>"Massachusetts; and he is humpbacked, but as +bright as can be."</p> + +<p>"I saw him, did I not? He was on the <i>Pioneer</i>?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; there he is with Ta Babeda."</p> + +<p>"Ta what?"</p> + +<p>"That's the Chief's name who owned the other +tribe on Rescue Island. Isn't he an immense fellow? +But he is a brick; I can tell you. Come over +and I'll introduce you," and Harry pulled Blakely +over while the latter resisted, as the men were constantly +besieging Blakely for orders.</p> + +<p>"Never mind the work now. Get acquainted with +the <i>big</i> men first," and the Professor laughed as he +saw the boys forcibly tug at Blakely and haul him +over to the group.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_189" id="p_189" href="#p_189">p. 189</a></span></p> + +<p>"This is one of the big men we have on the island," +said Harry to Ta Babeda, and the latter looked at +Blakely for a moment, and began to smile, for while +Blakely was chunky he was not at all large, if the +Chief might be taken as a standard.</p> + +<p>He took Ta Babeda's hand, and welcomed him +most heartily, and then turned to Ephraim, and also +extended a greeting.</p> + +<p>"This is the man who does all the business," said +Harry, "and he is going to make you a visit." At +this point they were interrupted.</p> + +<p>"Shall we store all the pineapples aft," said a man +hurriedly.</p> + +<p>"No; put them amidship," he answered.</p> + +<p>"We have no crates for the vegetables," said another.</p> + +<p>"Never mind, put them in the large boxes, and they +can be crated on the way."</p> + +<p>"Some more men have just come; what shall we +put them at?" was the report of another, and so +from one to the other, Blakely was ever ready with +a prompt answer.</p> + +<p>The Chiefs and Ephraim watched and wondered +at Blakely and his constant readiness to entertain +them, meanwhile giving orders to hundreds of the +workers who were crowding about. It was an object +lesson of what business meant, and the boys felt +proud and happy to see the great ability which he +displayed.</p> + +<p>But what a happy day it was for the Professor. +He and John were in close conference, after the +formal introductions were over. "There is some<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_190" id="p_190" href="#p_190">p. 190</a></span>thing +brewing," said George as he nudged Harry, +and cast a glance toward the place where they stood +in earnest conversation.</p> + +<p>"I do believe John is telling him about the copper +box; and by the way, he has never spoken about +that since we took it out of the cave. That is just +what he is doing; see, he is indicating the size of it."</p> + +<p>Harry laughed, as he answered: "I am satisfied +they will not do anything rash, without consulting +us," and George laughed at Harry's view of the +case.</p> + +<p>They had been absent from the island a little over +a month. During their absence the new hotel was +completed and was now in running order. This became +the headquarters for the visitors. While it +was only two stories in height, it contained nearly +a hundred rooms, and the utmost effort was made to +make all of them comfortable.</p> + +<p>The boys had their own rooms, and could not be +induced to give them up. John and the Professor +also maintained their old rooms, which were most +comfortable, and attached to the Professor's apartments +was a large room where the people came daily +to see him and consult about their many wants.</p> + +<p>He never failed to see them. It mattered not who +called, it was unvarying custom to greet all alike. +The affection for him in the minds of the people grew +stronger day by day.</p> + +<p>There were now five of the Chiefs on Wonder +Island permanent residents in Unity. A great +change had come over the feelings of the people +with respect to the ownership of land. When the +town was laid out, and the people began to flock to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_191" id="p_191" href="#p_191">p. 191</a></span> +the place, attracted by its many advantages, it began +to look for a time as though the different Chiefs +soon would find themselves without subjects.</p> + +<p>In addition to this the Professor recognized that +too many of the people were expecting to be put to +work in the city, and this would cause agriculture to +be abandoned, whereas it was obvious that they must +depend upon the soil for sustenance.</p> + +<p>John and the Professor therefore developed a +plan which would be the means of keeping the people +in their own sections, or, at least, encourage them +to till the ground.</p> + +<p>The Chiefs in Wonder Island owned the soil. +Their people reserved to themselves the right to hunt +and to gather the fruits and nuts necessary to sustain +life. But they had no right whatever, independently +of the Chiefs.</p> + +<p>The first step, therefore, was to gain the consent +of these rulers to a division of the land, so that all +their people might have farms. Uraso and Muro +were the first to agree to the plan, and it was quickly +followed by all except the Tuolos and the Illyas.</p> + +<p>The Chiefs themselves, under this plan, were to +receive one quarter of the acreage, and of the residue, +one-third was to be turned into what was called +a state fund, to be used for schools and for administrative +purposes, while the balance was to be given +to the people, who were to select their own land.</p> + +<p>For the purpose of enabling proper deeds to be +made, it was necessary to make a survey of the +islands, and this had been completed six months +previously, so that many of the people who now understood +that the lands selected belonged to them,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_192" id="p_192" href="#p_192">p. 192</a></span> +and could not be taken from them without their consent, +were only too happy to consent to remain on +their own land.</p> + +<p>But here another problem presented itself. It was +desirable that the people should build homes on these +farms, and Blakely and John evolved the plan to +provide certain quantities of lumber, at a low price, +to be paid for from the products of the land. This +had a most stimulating effect, and applications were +coming in from every quarter. As a result small saw +mills were put up in the territorial limits of each of +the tribes, so that it was an easy matter for the people +to get the lumber near home.</p> + +<p>But that which taxed the energies of Blakely most, +was to provide the farming implements and the seed +and instruction necessary to start them on the way. +As it was impossible to provide all the tools and +implements required for this purpose, Blakely had +recourse to the States, and by inserting a few advertisements +in the agricultural papers throughout +our country, it was not long before the implements +were forthcoming, all of which were paid for from +the reserve fund which had been provided.</p> + +<p>And now another thing of the utmost importance +happened. It was noised about from Maine to California +that there was an immense opportunity to +make money in the now well-known Wonder Island. +Every return trip of the <i>Wonder</i> from the nearest +South American port, brought Americans, with funds +to invest in plantations and in setting out coffee +trees and banana groves.</p> + +<p>Many Americans came from the great ranches of +South America, particularly Brazil, which furnishes<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_193" id="p_193" href="#p_193">p. 193</a></span> +full three-fourths of all the coffee of commerce. +These men went through the islands and began the +barter for the lands.</p> + +<p>At first this was encouraged, but it was soon, discovered +that the shrewd, and, more frequently than +otherwise, the unscrupulous traders were cheating +the unsophisticated people, so that the Professor had +to take a firm hand, and declare that no transfers +would be made until the sales had been investigated.</p> + +<p>This made the prices of lands go up by leaps and +bounds, and the Professor told the people that they +should not sell their holdings, as it would be much +better for them to own and till the farms than to sell +them and then work for the owners.</p> + +<p>All this tended to make the people appreciate that +they really owned something—that they had wealth +and power within their grasp. Then began, or +rather was carried out more systematically, the +founding of schools, and by many means the parents +themselves were induced to attend the schools.</p> + +<p>All were taught English. With the large funds +that the state had obtained in selling a portion of +the state lands, the Professor sent for teachers from +the United States, and these came prepared to take +up the work all over the island.</p> + +<p>The most interested workers were the Korinos, as +they were called on Rescue Island, and Krishnos on +Wonder Island. The Professor's first work, after +the conquest of the savages, was to educate those +people for teaching, and in this they were found to be +very efficient workers.</p> + +<p>The Korinos brought from Rescue were placed +under the tuition of the Krishnos, and it was sur<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_194" id="p_194" href="#p_194">p. 194</a></span>prising +to see how happily they regarded their lot, +and what progress they made after they understood +what was required.</p> + +<p>Although we have not a full account of all the +products shipped from Wonder Island during the +first six months, it might be stated that during the +last thirty days, the shipments from the port of +Unity, comprised 60,000 pounds of coffee, eighteen +tons of bananas, and six hundred quintals of spices, +besides over four hundred tons of fibres, of which +jute formed one-half.</p> + +<p>It is estimated that within another year, when +many of the large plantations should be ready to +yield their products, that amount would be increased +to such an extent that several additional ships would +be necessary to carry the tonnage.</p> + +<p>The foregoing is particularly instanced to show +what John could point out to the Chiefs who were +now their guests, and to impress upon them the +necessity and value of adopting such a land system +as they had established.</p> + +<p>Ephraim readily understood and approved of the +plan, but it was not so easy for Ta Babeda, and +Beralsea. At the quiet suggestion of John the opportunity +was made whereby they were constantly +thrown into contact with the resident chiefs. Within +a week they accepted the suggestions and a half +dozen surveyors were commissioned to go to the +islands and take up the work of surveying the lands, +and making records, which were to be put into such +form that the Chiefs would understand them.</p> + +<p>One day Ephraim, in conversation with John said: +"I want my boys to remain with you until they re<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_195" id="p_195" href="#p_195">p. 195</a></span>ceive +their education. I see that the opportunities +for work are unlimited, and I would also like to send +over a number of young men for the same purpose."</p> + +<p>"Your decision pleases us immensely," said John, +"and I have been wondering why your daughter +would not also like to remain for a time, as there is +much she can learn that will be of great help to you."</p> + +<p>Ephraim was silent for a while, while he looked +at John, and he finally answered: "That means +my wife will remain here also. But that has my +hearty consent. It will be for their good, and for +the good of my people."</p> + +<p>It was not long before Ta Babeda heard of Ephraim's +decision, and he adapted the same course to +the delight of his children. As for Beralsea, his +favorite daughter was already the wife of the Chief +Sutoto, of the Berees, and it was certain that she +would remain in Unity, so that there was no difficulty +in getting his consent to sending his children +and others who would carry on the work of education.</p> + +<p>But the boys had not, in the meantime, forgotten +their factory. The old water wheel was still there. +Money could not purchase it, and they would not +permit its removal. It was the same old crude +wheel built nearly three years before at the Cataract, +at the other end of the island, not more than two +miles from the rocky shore where the sea gave them +up.</p> + +<p>After the return there had been so much to see +and to learn, about the new developments, and the +visitors required so much attention that the boys +quite forgot the copper box, and to inquire about<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_196" id="p_196" href="#p_196">p. 196</a></span> +the condition of the paralyzed man who was found +at Hutoton.</p> + +<p>"The Professor has just told me," remarked +John, "that the old man is improving, and hopes that +within another month he will be able to talk."</p> + +<p>"Has he any idea of what his name is?"</p> + +<p>"Not in the least. He keeps mumbling something +about <i>the triangle</i>, or something of that kind, but +that is, of course, unintelligible."</p> + +<p>"I understand Retlaw is improving, also?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; we have thought of bringing the two men +together, as soon as the paralytic is so improved that +he can talk."</p> + +<p>"I have often wondered what kind of a disease +paralysis is?" inquired Harry.</p> + +<p>"Paralysis is not a disease of itself. It is merely +a sign of some disorder of the nervous system. It +may be shown by complete disability on one side of +the body, or in some particular portion, and only +certain sets of nerves may be affected."</p> + +<p>"But what seems so singular is, that he is not +only unable to speak but he cannot move about."</p> + +<p>"The form of paralysis, which affects the memory, +is called <i>dementia paralytica</i>, and attacks the +brain, while some portion of the body also may be +affected."</p> + +<p>"Isn't it curable?"</p> + +<p>"There is little hope for a permanent cure. If +the attack should come on suddenly it is the most +dangerous. Where it seems to approach gradually, +there is more likelihood of being able to check it."</p> + +<p>"In what way is there an improvement in the old +man?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_197" id="p_197" href="#p_197">p. 197</a></span></p> + +<p>"So far as the bodily ailment is concerned he is +gaining. When he was brought back he was unable +to utter a single word, nor could he move himself +in any way, except with one arm, and that only to +a small degree. Now he is able to shuffle along, +across the room, and sometimes tries to say something, +which is not distinct. The only thing which +thus far seems intelligible is the word <i>triangle</i>, as I +have stated."</p> + +<p>"Harry spoke about the copper box this morning. +Have you opened it yet?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Oh, no! I wouldn't think of doing it unless you +were present. The Professor and I have had several +talks about it, but we have all been so busy that +the matter has been deferred from time to time. I +hope we shall be able to get at it to-night."</p> + +<p>While thus engaged in conversation the Professor +appeared, smiling and happy. The boys greeted +him affectionately, as was their custom always.</p> + +<p>"Do you want to make a visit with me?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes; where?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"We will go out on B Street first," he answered.</p> + +<p>Together they passed the large school house, and +crossed the open square, and entered the most beautiful +of all the streets, the one laid out with rows +of trees along the curbs, and flower beds along the +middle portion of the driveway.</p> + +<p>"Can you guess where we are going?" asked the +Professor.</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Do you see the newly-painted house to the +right?"</p> + +<p>"Is that where Sutoto lives?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_198" id="p_198" href="#p_198">p. 198</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes; there is Cinda. Isn't she happy, though?"</p> + +<p>They went in and were accorded a happy welcome. +Her father, the Chief, Beralsea, and her mother, +Minda, were there, but Sutoto was absent.</p> + +<p>"And where is the bridegroom?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"He is in the yard somewhere. I will call him." +And she tripped out the steps, merry as a lark.</p> + +<p>Sutoto came in, and the boys simply shouted at +his appearance. He was covered with dirt and +grease, and made no great effort to conceal the fact.</p> + +<p>"And what have you been up to?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Come out and I will show you."</p> + +<p>In the little "garage," if it might be so termed, +was an auto, one which Sutoto had purchased and +brought back with him on his wedding trip. "I was +going to send for you," he said, addressing Harry, +"because I have been having trouble with the carbureter."</p> + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_199" id="p_199" href="#p_199">p. 199</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>THE SAVAGES AT UNITY</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>The</span> boys were simply wild with delight, and +George commenced to laugh immoderately, after +viewing the brightly-polished machine.</p> + +<p>"What is the matter? Anything wrong? Is it +upside down?" asked Sutoto.</p> + +<p>"No; I was just thinking how funny it seems that +one of the wild savages of the island should be the +first to import an automobile."</p> + +<p>Sutoto didn't in the least mind this allusion to his +former condition, but the boys were the only ones +who dared to jest with him in this manner. He +joined in the laugh, but quickly replied:</p> + +<p>"But I am not the only one favored in this way."</p> + +<p>"Why not?"</p> + +<p>"I know some other people who are indulging in +pleasure cars also."</p> + +<p>"Who is that?"</p> + +<p>"Well, Blakely has one, a fine little car he calls a +'runabout.'"</p> + +<p>"He never said anything about it. Then he +brought one over for John, and another for the Professor, +but you must keep quiet; they are not to know +anything about it."</p> + +<p>"Then there are two more machines down there +that have queer names on them, because the fellows<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_200" id="p_200" href="#p_200">p. 200</a></span> +themselves are peculiar, and are awfully civilized," +said Sutoto, with a faint attempt at a smile.</p> + +<p>Harry laid down the wrench and turned to Sutoto. +"What are the names?" he asked, for the first time +interested.</p> + +<p>"On one it says 'Mayfield,' and 'Crandall' on the +other." And Sutoto said this without cracking a +smile, or indicating that he really knew who the +names applied to.</p> + +<p>Probably, no one on the island, at least among the +natives, really knew the boys by any other designation +than George and Harry. The surnames were +of no use. Sutoto was simply "Sutoto," and no +more, and so with Uraso and Muro.</p> + +<p>The Professor and the old Chief heard the hilarity, +and were soon out of the house, and although the +boys and Sutoto tried to push the machine behind +the garage, they were too late for the Professor's +quick eye.</p> + +<p>He laughed when he saw the commotion. "It is all +right; if I were not so old, I would get one myself."</p> + +<p>"That's just the time you need it," said Harry. +"By the way," he continued, "I will bring it around +to your place this afternoon."</p> + +<p>"Bring what?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Your car; of course." And Sutoto and the boys +laughed at the Professor's discomfiture.</p> + +<p>"I thought there was some job about to be put +up on me. I wondered why Blakely tried to keep +me out of the warehouse yesterday."</p> + +<p>But while this merry scene was taking place, five +new machines were coming along B Street, with<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_201" id="p_201" href="#p_201">p. 201</a></span> +Blakely in the first one, and a competent chauffeur in +each of the others.</p> + +<p>"The first is yours, Harry, and the next one, with +the red body is yours, George," said Blakely. "I +thought we should surprise you."</p> + +<p>"Why, there is John, too!" exclaimed Sutoto.</p> + +<p>"Yes; he is in his car; he was greatly surprised. +But the Professor's car is a neat one; don't you +think so?"</p> + +<p>The boys had no ears for any one or for anything. +Each was a forty-horse power roadster, while the +Professor's car had a five-passenger body, was handsomely +upholstered, and equipped with particularly +easy-riding springs. John's machine was equally +well built, and after the boys had made a full examination +of their own treasures, they investigated the +other cars, and marveled at their beauty and appearance +of comfort.</p> + +<p>The procession of the machines naturally attracted +the people who came from all directions to witness +the wonder wagons which ran by themselves. They +crowded around, and listened to every comment. +The old Chief was the one most excited at the strange +things.</p> + +<p>Neither Sutoto nor Cinda had informed them of +the autos, because it was intended to have quite a +surprise party, and it was afterwards learned that +Blakely and Sutoto had planned to give all of them a +surprise. The fact that the Professor and the boys, +having gone to Sutoto that morning, were absent +from their homes, precipitated to disclosure, so that +John was found and together they went to Sutoto's +house.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_202" id="p_202" href="#p_202">p. 202</a></span></p> + +<p>You may be sure that it did not take the boys long +to learn the mysteries of the machines, and they +were with Sutoto, until he got the hang of the motor, +and could spin along as fast as any of them.</p> + +<p>The old Chief was finally induced to get into the +Professor's machine, and the latter instructed the +driver to proceed slowly. Minda, who was with +them, was the braver of the two, by far. The speed +was about six miles an hour, at which the Chief marveled.</p> + +<p>Then, gradually, the driver speeded up, until they +were making a comfortable speed of fifteen miles +an hour. As confidence increased the pleasure grew +stronger, and before they returned on the first trip +he was as determined as could be to have one for his +own use.</p> + +<p>Blakely took note of his wish, and said: "I shall +see to it that on the return trip one of the machines +will be shipped to you, but it will be two weeks before +the <i>Wonder</i> comes in."</p> + +<p>From that day on Sutoto had his hands full entertaining +the Chief, but the boys relieved him of +much of this, by taking him from place to place, +where he saw the work going on in all parts of the +beautiful country, and witnessed the planting of the +groves, the gathering of the crops, and the way in +which the produce was handled at the wharf.</p> + +<p>Sutoto's home was a beautiful structure of five +rooms, all nicely furnished, the gift of the Professor. +The boys enjoyed the visits there. Sutoto was +always a boy to them, and Cinda a happy bride,—and +a woman of whom any one might be proud.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_203" id="p_203" href="#p_203">p. 203</a></span></p> + +<p>When Beralsea, her father, decided that his children +must remain and attend the schools there, the +adjoining cottage was prepared for them, and Minda +consented to stay, but Beralsea, who had now partaken +of the commercial instincts, under the tutelage +of Blakely, was determined to return at once and +revolutionize the condition of affairs in Venture +Island.</p> + +<p>That day he and Ta Babeda had a long conversation, +and together they visited John and Ephraim, +and then called in Blakely. The boys were present, +of course, and it then turned out that they had agreed +upon a plan to start the agricultural work in the two +islands conjointly, and the only question which remained +was to take care of the management of the +work.</p> + +<p>Both of the Chiefs declared that they did not possess +the qualifications to direct the work, and Ephraim +pleaded age as the reason why it would be impossible +to undertake the burdens.</p> + +<p>"I have an idea," he said, "that the best solution +would be to make George and Harry the managers +for the islands. I have been with the boys for some +time, and see what they are capable of, and every +one would be glad to work under them."</p> + +<p>The boys were, of course, somewhat confused at +the encomium, and the Professor came to their rescue. +"These are my boys," he said. "I have +known them ever since they came to the island. +They have been with me under every condition of +service. We have had hours and days of pleasure, +and of trials, such as few have undergone, and al<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_204" id="p_204" href="#p_204">p. 204</a></span>ways, +whatever the circumstances, they have been +manly, and never gave up, although sometimes things +seemed hopeless.</p> + +<p>"You have seen how, through their ingenuity, they +have built the water wheel, the mills and the factories. +Fortune has been kind to them; they do not +need the money that may come to them, as they have +found riches here, far greater than you know, but +they have loved the work, for the pleasure it has +brought them, and it is for them to decide."</p> + +<p>"Harry and I have talked about these things many +times," answered George. "When we first came to +the island, we had nothing. For our own preservation +we set about to better our condition, began to +build the things necessary to maintain life, and to +protect ourselves.</p> + +<p>"What at first was a necessity, later became a +pleasure, because we could see, day after day, how +we built the shop and the machinery out of the crude +things; it would be hard to leave that work now."</p> + +<p>Harry approvingly nodded his head, as he responded: +"I consider it a pleasure to do anything +which would help the people here. George and I feel +that it would be wrong to leave them, so long as we +can be of service to them.</p> + +<p>"The money we have will not make us happy; that +I know, unless we can use it to do some good. And +it is so with our time, also. I am as willing to give +that as money, because we have been amply rewarded +and now our duty is to the people here."</p> + +<p>As a result of the conference it was agreed that +George and Harry should take up the management of +the affairs on Venture and Rescue Islands, they to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_205" id="p_205" href="#p_205">p. 205</a></span> +decide which should be the particular sphere of each.</p> + +<p>The Chiefs were immensely pleased at this arrangement, +and the first steps were taken to put their +plans into execution.</p> + +<p>John advised them that they should decide which +island each would take, and then each should cultivate +the acquaintance of the young men that the +Chiefs should select, so that the administrative functions +could be instilled into them, and that they might +be taught the business qualifications necessary.</p> + +<p>George laughingly remarked that as the Chief +Beralsea had so accommodatingly captured him, +when they first arrived on the island, he thought that +their intimate acquaintance, which was so long prior +to Harry's should decide the matter in his favor, by +taking Venture Island.</p> + +<p>"That suits me all right. I have one advantage +over you on Rescue Island; and that is the caves. +You haven't even an excuse for a cave."</p> + +<p>"But I have Hutoton, that terrible place where the +criminals live," retorted George, with a laugh.</p> + +<p>"And that reminds me; what about the copper +box?"</p> + +<p>The boys wended their way to the Professor, and +were delighted to find John there. "Before we go +we want to have the copper box opened," remarked +Harry.</p> + +<p>"I have just brought it around, in the machine," +said John, as he noticed the boys peering at it +through the window.</p> + +<p>"What is that in the package lying on the box?"</p> + +<p>"Can't you guess?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_206" id="p_206" href="#p_206">p. 206</a></span></p> + +<p>"Have you forgotten the skull with the inscription +on it?"</p> + +<p>"Do you mean the skull we found on the headland +at the eastern end of the island?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Why, what is that for? Do you think it has anything +to do with the box?"</p> + +<p>"Probably not; but I was curious to examine it +further in view of the similarity of the chart and the +inscription."</p> + +<p>The boys could not possibly understand what was +meant by such a reference. While they were talking +the Professor entered the room, and remarked, +"I have just come from the old fellow, and his reason +is returning under the treatment, and he is also +better physically."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean the paralytic?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but there is one thing which is singular, +and that is the constant muttering of the word <i>triangle</i>. +This morning I could plainly distinguish +several other words, such as 'of' and 'three,' and +'very well,' and parts of other words, showing that +in time, if his improvement continues, we may get +more information."</p> + +<p>"I have an idea," hurriedly shouted George as he +broke for the door. "Wait for me," he said, as he +turned around and cast a glance back into the room. +"I will be back at once," were the last words they +heard.</p> + +<p>John laughed at George's precipitous flight. "I +suppose he has just thought of something that bears +on the case. In the meantime, and while George is<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_207" id="p_207" href="#p_207">p. 207</a></span> +away, you, Harry, might get a hammer and a cold +chisel. We may have to cut the top off."</p> + +<p>Harry rushed out and taking John's machine was +quickly at the shop, where he secured a hammer and +several cold chisels capable of cutting the copper.</p> + +<p>When he returned George was there, and was unfolding +the paper scrap which they found below the +skull. "Probably, this will explain the triangle," +said George, as he pointed to the V-shaped mark. +"The upper part of it is very likely worn away, so +that we cannot see it."</p> + +<p>John smiled at the suggestion as he took the paper +and carefully examined it. "Your view may be correct," +he responded.</p> + +<p>"That looks like a suggestion of a line," said +Harry, pointing to a faint scratch near the upper +margin.</p> + +<p>The Professor's messenger came in hurriedly, and +announced that the paralytic had sent for him. "I +will return by the time the box is opened," said the +Professor, as he hurriedly went out of the door.</p> + +<p>"Now for the box," said Harry. The slitting +chisel was applied, and he dextrously cut along the +top, under the directions of John.</p> + +<p>"Direct the chisel downwardly, to see if there is +any seam to be found along the side," directed John.</p> + +<p>"Yes; here is the place where the top was put on," +shouted Harry.</p> + +<p>"Why, it has been soldered," said George. +"Well, that means business."</p> + +<p>It was evident that the soldering was effectively +done, because the solder had run entirely through the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_208" id="p_208" href="#p_208">p. 208</a></span> +seam, and it was really sweated on. The copper +used was about an eighth of an inch thick, and the +soft and ductile character showed that it was pure +metal.</p> + +<p>"Be very careful as you get around so as not to +disturb the contents, by the falling of the lid," said +John.</p> + +<p>It still adhered at various places, and this was +carefully cut away by one of the thin chisels, and the +lid finally raised at one corner, sufficiently to disclose +a portion of the contents, which appeared to be round +and white, and resting near the center of the space.</p> + +<p>All caught a glimpse of it, and involuntarily +started back in surprise. It was a skull, the counterpart +of the one lying on the table which contained +the inscription.</p> + +<p>"Open it wide," said John in a peculiar voice, and +as he did so the Professor rushed in and announced +that the paralytic had recovered speech, and he had +ordered him to be brought in.</p> + +<p>While the Professor was saying this, John was +slowly raising the lid, and by a quick motion tore it +away, and the Professor was actually taken aback +at the sight before him. He gazed for a moment, +and then muttered: "And the same inscription +too!"</p> + +<p>All looked toward it in amazement, and while puzzling +over its meaning, the paralytic was helped in +by two attendants. He came forward, saw the two +skulls, and before either could prevent it he collapsed +and fell to the floor, apparently lifeless.</p> + +<p>He was gathered up and placed on a couch, and +restoratives applied by the Professor. He lay thus<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_209" id="p_209" href="#p_209">p. 209</a></span> +in a stupor for more than a half hour, but soon returning +consciousness began to manifest itself, and +when he opened his eyes, and glanced about, his lips +began to move. Here the Professor held up a warning +hand, which he seemed to heed, for he immediately +closed his eyes, and was soon asleep, as his +breathing became regular, and the pulse began to act +normally.</p> + +<p>"There must be no more agitation now," said the +Professor. "We can take the box to the adjoining +room." This was done, and John carefully lifted +the skull from its resting place, bringing with it a +mass of other material, which looked like brown or +discolored parchment.</p> + +<p>The skulls were placed side by side. They were +singularly alike, the inscription of the one found on +the headland, was on the left side, and the like figures +of the one taken from the box were on the right +side.</p> + +<p>"That is a singular thing," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"So it is," answered John, "but it doubtless has +a meaning," he continued.</p> + +<p>Beneath the box, and attached to the wrappings, +was a mass of material which John eagerly seized, +and began to unwrap, while the Professor interestedly +looked on. There was not the first sign of any +treasure in the box, and when the several folds of the +parchment were unrolled, the boys could see the +hieroglyphics that the Professor and John so eagerly +scanned.</p> + +<p>"Yes, yes, I knew you would come back," said the +man in the adjoining room, and John dropped the +parchment and followed the Professor into the room,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_210" id="p_210" href="#p_210">p. 210</a></span> +where they saw the old man sitting on the couch and +staring about with an inquiring countenance.</p> + +<p>"What is your name?" said the Professor.</p> + +<p>He did not answer at first but looked at John and +the Professor in amazement.</p> + +<p>"Why do you ask?" he then muttered, without +changing his countenance. "I have told you over +and over," he continued.</p> + +<p>"Do you know where you are?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Certainly. You may ask Walter about that."</p> + +<p>"Walter? Do you know Walter?" asked George, +almost involuntarily.</p> + +<p>He smiled and nodded his head. "He is here. I +saw him yesterday. I wish he would explain." +Then he dropped back on the couch and remained +motionless.</p> + +<p>The effort to arouse him was useless, and the Professor +advised patience. There was something so +peculiar about the whole situation that it fascinated +the boys. What did this man know about Walter? +Possibly, through him the great mystery, that commenced +with the note in the seat of their boat, would +be explained.</p> + +<p>After they came back to the island, Retlaw rapidly +recovered, and was frequently found wandering +around the town. On several occasions he called on +the Professor. To the surprise of all he appeared +at this time, surprised to find John and the boys +present, and appeared to be terribly startled on seeing +the two skulls.</p> + +<p>The moment he saw the paralytic, he became agitated, +and started for the door. John barred the +way, and said: "Do you know that man?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_211" id="p_211" href="#p_211">p. 211</a></span></p> + +<p>In a hesitating voice, he answered: "Yes; I know +him well. Where did you find him?" and notwithstanding +he saw the quiet figure he drew back with +an expression of fear and hesitancy.</p> + +<p>George slyly drew forth the Walter note, referred +to in the previous volume, "Adventures on Strange +Islands," and handed it to John. The latter seized +it and said: "Did you ever see this?"</p> + +<p>He grasped the paper, and answered: "Where +did you get this? Did he have it?"</p> + +<p>"No," replied the Professor; "we found it in a +recess at the end of a seat in our boat,—the one we +made on this island, three years ago."</p> + +<p>"I do not know how it could have gotten there. +It was written to Clifford,—"</p> + +<p>"John B. Clifford?" asked Harry in excitement.</p> + +<p>Retlaw turned, when he heard Harry. "Yes," +was the hesitating answer.</p> + +<p>"Do you know Walter?" asked John.</p> + +<p>He did not reply, but glanced at all of them, and +while doing so Harry came forward, and said: +"Isn't your name Walter?"</p> + +<p>The man started back and held up his hand: +"What makes you think so?" he asked in alarm.</p> + +<p>"Because <i>Retlaw</i> reversed, spells Walter," answered +Harry.</p> + +<p>It was time for the Professor to show surprise +at the acuteness of Harry's conclusions. John took +the cue at once. "Why are you trying to deceive +us?"</p> + +<p>He dropped his eyes, and was silent, and then he +slowly turned to the quiet man.</p> + +<p>John noticed the movement. "Who was the man<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_212" id="p_212" href="#p_212">p. 212</a></span> +tied to the vessel and wrecked on the island to the +south of us?"</p> + +<p>This question by John produced an added agitation +in the deportment of the man. He was visibly +affected by the question, but there was no reply.</p> + +<p>"As you do not feel disposed to answer our questions +we must detain or keep you in custody until +Clifford recovers," said John, and motioning to the +boys, they gathered around him, and called in the +attendants and ordered the men to take charge of +him.</p> + +<p>As they were about to pass out the door, Ephraim +ascended the steps and was about to pass into the +open door. He caught sight of the curious group, +and when his eye alighted on the figure on the couch, +he drew back for a moment, while his gaze remained +fixed.</p> + +<p>Then he calmly moved forward, slowly shaking +his head from side to side, and muttered: "That +looks like Clifford, my companion on the ship, and +the one who aided me to gain a foothold on the spar. +How did he come here?"</p> + +<p>"That is the man we found at Hutoton," said +John. "But do you know this man?" he asked, +pointing to Walter.</p> + +<p>Ephraim turned, and scrutinized his face. "No, I +have never seen him, to my knowledge."</p> + +<p>Walter moved back with a sigh of relief, while +John and the Professor looked at each other with +puzzled expressions.</p> + +<p>"Then the man we found tied to the boat was not +Clifford!" exclaimed George.</p> + +<p>John looked at Walter, and he saw him grow pale.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_213" id="p_213" href="#p_213">p. 213</a></span></p> + +<p>"Who was the man," he asked, in a threatening tone, +as he approached Walter. The latter hesitated. +"We are determined to ferret out this matter, and +it will be to your advantage to tell us the whole +story, for we shall find it out sooner or later."</p> + +<p>"I must have time to think," he answered, as he +put his hands to his head, and turned to Clifford.</p> + +<p>"You may have until to-morrow, but in the meantime, +we shall see to it that you are kept within +our sight," responded John, as he motioned to the +men to take him away.</p> + +<p>As he left the door Harry said: "Why do you +suppose he wanted time?"</p> + +<p>John looked at Clifford for a moment, and answered: +"Evidently, he had hopes that Clifford +would not survive."</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_214" id="p_214" href="#p_214">p. 214</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<h3>UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>At</span> the suggestion of the Professor, Clifford was +left in quiet, while John and the boys deferred their +further attempts to explore the mysterious occurrences +that were looming up.</p> + +<p>They canvassed every phase of the situation, in the +hope that some explanation might be offered. +What could have been the relations of Walter and +Clifford, and who was the man that met his death +in the boat at Venture Island?</p> + +<p>Why had the sight of the copper box and the skulls +so agitated Walter? The latter, apparently, knew +of the missive, which was, evidently, written by him, +but why did he not give an outright answer concerning +it when John asked him point blank?</p> + +<p>It did not take the boys long to inform Sutoto of +the development and the mystery concerning the +two men. The old Chief, Beralsea, was taken over +to see Walter, in order to identify him if possible, +and then Harry suggested that Ta Babeda might +know something of his early history, as Walter was +found a prisoner at his village when John and the +boys arrived there.</p> + +<p>Beralsea had never seen nor heard of him, and +Ta Babeda gave the following account of his capture: +"About three years previously several men,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_215" id="p_215" href="#p_215">p. 215</a></span> +of whom Walter was one, arrived at the island, on a +small boat, something like the one carried by the +<i>Pioneer</i>, and which was used at the landing."</p> + +<p>(It should be stated that one of the boats, and +probably, the one referred to, was the identical lifeboat, +No. 3, which the boys had fitted up for use on +the <i>Pioneer</i>.)</p> + +<p>"This boat was kept by them at the inlet directly +east of the cave where the Korinos were lodged. I +did not know anything of this for some time, but the +Korinos learned of the presence of the men, and my +warriors were set to watch the men. A few days +afterwards, another boat, much smaller, appeared +with two men, but from all appearances they were a +different party, and after they had a conference, it +appeared as though there was trouble between the +different parties."</p> + +<p>"We were about to close in on them, when at the +height of their quarrel, but they caught sight of us, +and joined in resisting the attack against us. With +the guns they had we were no match for them, so we +had to retire to the village.</p> + +<p>"The next morning we learned that they had gone, +and on searching the shore found something with +marks on, it, that had no meaning to us so it was destroyed."</p> + +<p>"Was it something like this?" asked Harry, handing +him a sketch.</p> + +<p>The Chief studied it for a few moments, and answered: +"It seems to me it was like that. The +marks were something like these," and he pointed to +the crosses.</p> + +<p>Harry had made the identical marking which were<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_216" id="p_216" href="#p_216">p. 216</a></span> +on the two skulls, which, it will be remembered, +showed the characters + V, and below these three +X X X, followed by a star.</p> + +<p>"I suspected as much," said John. "They were, +quite possibly, on the same quest. But where did +they get the information?" And he turned to the +Professor for a possible explanation.</p> + +<p>The latter was now thoroughly interested. "Unless +Walter chooses to tell, the matter may not be +solved, unless Clifford recovers, and even though +he should regain his physical powers, the mind may +have relapsed into its late condition."</p> + +<p>By agreement John and the boys remained at the +Professor's home that night, awaiting symptoms of +the patient's disease, and during the night they recounted +over and over again the adventures they +had undergone, and the experiences with the natives.</p> + +<p>They conversed about the new enterprise into +which they were to embark, and the Professor congratulated +them on the decision to remain and enter +the commercial, or business field. "After all," he +said, "there is nothing which so broadens a man as +to have an occupation, and give to that business the +energies of his mind."</p> + +<p>"Of course, there are many things that the natives +must learn, but they are so willing to work, +that it is a pleasure to show them," said Harry. +"The best men we have had in the shops were the +common natives, but there is one thing that has always +been troublesome, and that is to give them +different names."</p> + +<p>"That is just what I had in mind for some time," +added George. "It didn't make much difference<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_217" id="p_217" href="#p_217">p. 217</a></span> +where there were only a few,—a hundred or so, but +now, when we have three hundred or more it is rather +confusing to have a dozen or more <i>Lolos</i>, and as +many more <i>Walbes</i>, and names like that."</p> + +<p>"It might be a good idea to suggest that each +one have a sort of surname, so that there will be no +difficulty of that kind hereafter," suggested John.</p> + +<p>"A family name would be the proper thing," +added the Professor.</p> + +<p>"For my part, I don't see how people can get +along without it," remarked George.</p> + +<p>"But it has not always been the custom to have +surnames, or family names," suggested the Professor.</p> + +<p>"But the Romans did," exclaimed George.</p> + +<p>"Yes, they had three names: the first was the prenomen, +which was a distinctive mark of the individual; +then the nomen, or the name of the clan; and +third, the cognomen, which was the family name. +The first name was usually written with a capital +letter only, like M. Thus, M. Tullius Cicero."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is the first time it ever occurred to +me that the Romans parted their names in the middle," +said George, as he smiled at the allusion.</p> + +<p>"The ancient Greeks, with the exception of a few +of the leading families in Athens and Sparta, had +only a single name. Among the German and Celtic +nations each individual had only one name, and that +was also true of the ancient Hebrews; the names +Abraham, David, Aaron and the others were used +singly, and this was also the case in Egypt, +Syria and Persia, and throughout all of Western +Asia."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_218" id="p_218" href="#p_218">p. 218</a></span></p> + +<p>"But it has never been so in England, has it?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"During the entire period that England was under +the dominion of the Saxons, the single name was +prevalent. But that was changed later when feudalism +was established and the different lords began +to gather their vassals, and to register them."</p> + +<p>"But what is the principle on which the names are +built?"</p> + +<p>"In various ways; at first they distinguished +father and son by adding the word <i>son</i> to the +father's name. If he was of German descent <i>sohn</i> +would be added; if of Danish origin, the word <i>sen</i>, +so that the son's name in either case would be William<i>son</i>, +or Ander<i>sohn</i>, or Thorwald<i>sen</i>, or a given +name with the designation <i>son</i> added."</p> + +<p>"But how about the many other names, and those +coming after the second generation?"</p> + +<p>"They had to be named after the locality, like +John <i>Brook</i>, or David <i>Hill</i>, or something of that +kind, even to an occupation, like the <i>Smiths</i>, or the +<i>Fishers</i>, as well as qualifications, such as <i>Wise</i> and +<i>Good</i> were adopted as surnames."</p> + +<p>Every hour Clifford's condition was noted, and +before morning his pulse began to beat with greater +regularity, and all felt that it would be well to take +a nap, to prepare for what they knew must be an +interesting, if not exciting chapter, to round out +their adventures, and to lay bare the few mysteries +which yet remained to be solved.</p> + +<p>Sutoto came to the Professor's house quite early, +with news from Blakely that Walter had disappeared. +He had learned of the imprisonment and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_219" id="p_219" href="#p_219">p. 219</a></span> +that Walter was placed in the regular lock-up, where +a few recalcitrants were confined.</p> + +<p>How he escaped was not known. True, not much +of a guard was maintained, and the natives had no +idea that the prisoner was of more than ordinary importance.</p> + +<p>John was very much disappointed, but he felt that +he alone was to blame, because in the anxiety for +Clifford he had entirely overlooked the precaution +necessary. He went down to the jail, with the boys, +and learned from the inmates that when the man +was brought in he appeared to be unconcerned, and +immediately selected his sleeping quarters, and that +was the last they knew of him.</p> + +<p>As the boys were going to their own rooms, a messenger +came from the Professor that Clifford was +awake, and appeared to be rational, and was now +partaking of food. After breakfast they hurried +over to the Professor, and found John there smiling.</p> + +<p>"I have had a little talk with him."</p> + +<p>"What does he say?"</p> + +<p>"I have not yet questioned him."</p> + +<p>Clifford looked at the boys curiously. "Are you +the boys that Mr. Varney spoke about?"</p> + +<p>"I suppose we are," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"His story interested me very much. I learn that +you have a regular manufacturing town here, and +that you built all these things without any outside +help, before you communicated with the outside +world."</p> + +<p>"Yes; and we had a glorious time doing it, too, +but we owe everything to the Professor and John."</p> + +<p>"That is really commendable to hear you say so.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_220" id="p_220" href="#p_220">p. 220</a></span> +But you said, Mr. Varney, that Walter told you Clifford +limped, and it was on account of this peculiarity +you were led to believe that the dead man on +Venture Island was Clifford?"</p> + +<p>"One of the three men with Walter, was lame."</p> + +<p>"Then it must have been one of his party that was +murdered?"</p> + +<p>"But Walter was explicit to tell us that one of +your legs was shorter than the other. I early +learned that such was not the case, and that is what +confused me in identifying you. But there is also +another thing which I could not understand."</p> + +<p>"What is that?"</p> + +<p>"Ephraim Wilmar."</p> + +<p>"Stop! stop!" almost shouted Clifford. "You +said <i>Ephraim Wilmar</i>. Do you know him?"</p> + +<p>"Know him? He is here on the island."</p> + +<p>"When did he come? Where is he?"</p> + +<p>"He lives on an island north of the place we +found you, and is Chief of a tribe there."</p> + +<p>"Chief of a tribe!" he exclaimed. "An island to +the north,—the <i>triangle</i>,"—and the boys rose from +their seats in the excitement.</p> + +<p>"Where is Walter's letter?—Quick," said Harry.</p> + +<p>George fumbled in his pockets with eagerness. +"Is that the triangle?" eagerly questioned Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes, yes; there it is again. The three islands, +and the arrow."</p> + +<p>"But what does the star mean,—the star that follows, +as you see?"</p> + +<p>"That,—that is to show the position of the three +islands."</p> + +<p>"Position of the three islands? What islands?<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_221" id="p_221" href="#p_221">p. 221</a></span> +and how does it tell the positions?" George was +fairly frantic now.</p> + +<p>"There must be three islands, and one of them +was the one I was on when you found me, and one is +here, because Mr. Varney told me about this one, +and then there is another, which you said was to +the north of,—of—"</p> + +<p>"Hutoton," said John.</p> + +<p>"Yes; Hutoton. But the positions! Yes; you +will understand! One point is the Southern Cross, +near the South polar Circle, the second point is the +fixed star Antares, and the third is the fixed star +Spica, which, together form a perfect triangle, one +limb of which passes through a cluster of stars +called the Compasses."</p> + +<p>"But what has that to do with the locations of the +three islands?"</p> + +<p>"They are situated, with relation to each other, +exactly the same as the three stars are placed in the +heavens."</p> + +<p>"What was the object of the three crosses before +the star?"</p> + +<p>"The three represented thirty."</p> + +<p>"Thirty what?"</p> + +<p>"Leagues."</p> + +<p>"And the arrow?"</p> + +<p>"The direction from Spica."</p> + +<p>"Why from Spica?"</p> + +<p>"Because that star is the one which represents the +island on which this particular chart happens to be +found."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean that a similar chart will be found +on each island?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_222" id="p_222" href="#p_222">p. 222</a></span></p> + +<p>"No; on only two of them."</p> + +<p>The boys were astounded at this information. +John and the Professor remained quiet while the +boys thus questioned Clifford.</p> + +<p>John interrupted to inquire why there were only +two charts.</p> + +<p>"The record is found on the third."</p> + +<p>"So Wonder and Venture Islands are the only +ones which have the inscriptions on the skulls?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>Clifford sat up with such a sudden start that the +boys were alarmed. He leaned forward, and hurriedly +asked the following questions: "You say, +'Inscriptions on the skulls?' How do you know? +and why do you say that they are on Wonder and +Venture Islands?"</p> + +<p>"Because we have two of them."</p> + +<p>He dropped back on the pillow, and reflected for +some time, and then slowly said: "But there must +be three. One of them is still with the records."</p> + +<p>"No; we have the one with the records."</p> + +<p>A smile illuminated his features, the tension was +relaxed, and he dropped back, and pressed his hands +over his forehead, as he muttered: "I am so glad, +so glad, so glad," and his voice died down, and he +remained quiet, as though in sleep.</p> + +<p>The questioners sat there in silence, and watched +him as he slept. The Professor motioned them to +withdraw, and they passed into the adjoining room.</p> + +<p>"It is clear to me now," remarked John. "The +knowledge of the record was known to others, and +I was not aware that any one besides ourselves<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_223" id="p_223" href="#p_223">p. 223</a></span> +really had figured out the secret," remarked John, +as he turned to the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Well, I came pretty close to it," exclaimed +Harry. "I told you that the three X's meant thirty +leagues."</p> + +<p>"So you did," said John. "Prior to the finding +of the skull I did not know of the full inscription. +Its significance did not come to me until we reached +Venture Island."</p> + +<p>"I remember now! I told George that I saw the +chart you had made."</p> + +<p>John smiled. "It would have deceived you, however."</p> + +<p>"Why?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Because, if you remember it the third island was +to the south of Venture, and not to the north as we +really found it."</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_224" id="p_224" href="#p_224">p. 224</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2> + +<h3>THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL</h3> + + +<p><span class='smcap'>It</span> was late that afternoon when Clifford awoke, +and plainly much, refreshed, and improved physically. +When he saw the Professor he said: "I +have not told you all, but I want the boys here for +that purpose, because I know it will interest them."</p> + +<p>When the boys arrived they awaited the coming of +John, who informed them that Uraso had received +word of the capture of Walter, but that he would not +arrive until noon.</p> + +<p>Clifford greeted them effusively, and it was evident +that he had recovered his spirits, and was well +on the road to recovery. After some general talk +on uninteresting topics, he began his story:</p> + +<p>"I was on the vessel with Ephraim when we ran +into the monsoon which wrecked the vessel. After +days of suffering I became unconscious, and when +the spar finally reached the shore, I was aroused +sufficiently to save myself, and after wandering +around for some time, came up to a tribe of natives, +who took good care of me.</p> + +<p>"I had no means of determining the latitude or +longitude, because I was then only about twenty +years of age, and had shipped on the vessel at +Shanghai, because I was anxious to return home. I +remained with the people about three years, and +they were called Osagas."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_225" id="p_225" href="#p_225">p. 225</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why, this town is built in the Osagas' territory," +said Harry.</p> + +<p>"That may be so, but it is enough for the present +to know that it was somewhere on this island that I +reached the shore, and that about three years thereafter +I was fortunate enough to catch sight of a sailing +vessel, and on her I reached San Francisco.</p> + +<p>"In course of time I built up a profitable shipping +business, and owned several vessels engaged in the +coast and Alaska trade. Like all shipping men on +the western coast, I learned of the many accounts, +most of them fables, concerning the treasures on the +islands in the South Seas, but they never had any +effect on me until about three years ago, I had a +hand in furnishing the outfit for a vessel which departed +on such a mission, that sailed some time in +December or January, of that year."</p> + +<p>"Do you know the name of the vessel?" asked +John.</p> + +<p>"Yes; the <i>Juan Ferde</i>. Why do you ask?"</p> + +<p>"I sailed in that vessel with Blakely, one of the +owners."</p> + +<p>"Blakely? Blakely, did you say? Why he is the +man who purchased all the provisions from me."</p> + +<p>"He is here on the island, and now has charge of +all the business matters connected with our venture."</p> + +<p>"Well, that is remarkable, indeed; but I must proceed. +Four months after the <i>Juan Ferde</i> sailed, I +came into contact with a peculiar character, who had +been all over the southern part of the universe, and +he finally interested me sufficiently to look over some +peculiar documents which he had, bearing on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_226" id="p_226" href="#p_226">p. 226</a></span> +subject of the lost treasures, and from the information +which he gave, it occurred to me that the location +could not be far from the island where I was +cast ashore.</p> + +<p>"With a good business, and entirely free from all +family entanglements, I made up my mind that I +would accompany him, and finance the undertaking. +What induced me more than anything else, was the +fact that the stories he told corresponded so nearly +with the information which Blakely gave me, although +the latter did not go into many details, that +I looked on the venture in the nature of a lark. Besides +I wanted to meet my old friends on the island, +and possibly induce them to gather the products +of the island for me.</p> + +<p>"We sailed about five months after the <i>Juan +Ferde</i> left, and had a quick run to the island where +it was supposed I had been left years before. It +seems that at the time I landed there the tribe was +at war, and we had a terrible time to get away from +the people, who, of course, did not remember me, +even though the tribe was the same, but of this I had +no absolute knowledge at the time.</p> + +<p>"Two months after reaching the island, we sailed +to the south, in order to explore the second island, +noted on the chart, and it was then that the returning +monsoon, which usually blows in the opposite +direction from the one of six months before, wrecked +the vessel, and the next day one of my companions +and myself, who were so far as I then knew, the only +survivors, reached the southern shore of an island, +where we saw high mountains, so unlike those in the +island where I was shipwrecked years before."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_227" id="p_227" href="#p_227">p. 227</a></span></p> + +<p>"While I think of it," remarked John, "how did +you know about the second island, to which you refer?"</p> + +<p>"I learned this from Walter."</p> + +<p>"Then did you know anything about the skull on +the headland, and the note which Walter left?"</p> + +<p>"I knew about the skull, but never heard of the +note to which you refer. The discovery of the skull +was an accident, and I attached no importance to it +at the time. From the southern portion of the island +we journeyed along the eastern coast, to the +north, skirting a large forest on the way."</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other, significantly, but +he did not notice this.</p> + +<p>"Then we reached a large river, and to our surprise, +found a boat, evidently of native manufacture, +and with this floated down the stream to the sea."</p> + +<p>"But where did you get the rope that we found in +the boat?" asked George, eagerly.</p> + +<p>He turned, and answered: "How did you know +we put any rope on the boat?"</p> + +<p>"Because that was the boat we made, and we +found it afterwards, with the strange rope and +oars."</p> + +<p>"Strange oars. I know nothing about them. We +used the oars found in the boat."</p> + +<p>"Did you get the boat near a large falls?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"And on the north side of the river?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but after we reached the sea, it was too +rough, and the wind was blowing too heavily from +the north to make it safe to navigate in that direction, +so we went south, probably ten miles, and drew<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_228" id="p_228" href="#p_228">p. 228</a></span> +ashore. The next morning when I awoke the boat +and my companion were missing."</p> + +<p>"Who was your companion?"</p> + +<p>"Walter."</p> + +<p>John looked indignant, and expressed his opinion +very forcibly, but Clifford held up his hand, restrainingly. +"Do not be too harsh. I have no ill will +toward him. I did not know what to do, nor which +way to turn, but went to the west, and before night, +came, unexpectedly, on the remains of a fire, which +led me to believe that I would find friends in the inhabitants.</p> + +<p>"I went on and on, and caught up with the band, +and was then horrified to find that they were having +a feast, and sacrificing human beings. I saw Walter +among the captives, but I could not contrive to let +him know of my presence, and left the place as hurriedly +as I could.</p> + +<p>"After a month of struggling I reached the southern +part of the island, and there, to my joy, found +three of my companions on a life boat, belonging to +a vessel called the <i>Investigator</i>, and together we +made a course southeast, and there found the location +of the second skull."</p> + +<p>"But you knew nothing of that at the time, did +you?"</p> + +<p>"I did not know what the marks on the skull were +for, but the finding of the second one was sufficient +to revive in me the hope that, after all, the treasure +might be found. One of the men, who was the intimate +of Walter, figured out the course to be taken, +and we reached the island to the north the second +day.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_229" id="p_229" href="#p_229">p. 229</a></span></p> + +<p>"There, to our surprise, we found Walter, and he +charged one of the men with me, with trying to secure +the treasure, but I finally patched up the matter, +and we agreed to work in concert. Then, when +the next day, we found that Walter had lost the +chart, we felt that it was a trick on his part to deceive +us, and we separated. At that time I did not +believe he told us the truth.</p> + +<p>"Two days afterwards we passed a party of natives, +who were not aware of our presence, and then +we saw that Walter, and the man with him, had been +captured, and later believed that they had been +killed. We searched the island, to find the cave, but +were unsuccessful and thinking that an error might +have been made, we concluded to sail for the island +to the south.</p> + +<p>"We found a tribe of natives when we landed, and +owing to the exposure and the trials we had gone +through I was taken ill, and grew worse and worse, +and from that time on to the time I recovered two +days ago, I had not the slightest idea of what +passed."</p> + +<p>"When I spoke against Walter a few moments +ago," said John, "you said he was not to blame. +What did you mean by that?"</p> + +<p>"During my wanderings, I found parts of the +chart, which, I assumed, had been lost by John, and, +probably, destroyed by the natives. The part I recovered +was of no value to me, but it entirely +changed my opinion of Walter."</p> + +<p>But Clifford's story left something to be told. It +did not explain why Walter tried to avoid meeting +Clifford; or why he was so startled upon seeing the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_230" id="p_230" href="#p_230">p. 230</a></span> +two skulls, or the reason for avoiding the reference +to the letter to which his name was signed.</p> + +<p>The boys were so intensely interested in his story +that they did not notice the entrance of Blakely, who +had brought Walter back, but when Clifford saw +Blakely there was immediate recognition.</p> + +<p>Clifford held out his hand to Walter, as he said: +"I did wrong in doubting you. I understand from +the statement made by Ta Babeda, that they found +the chart the next day, after we met them, and that, +of course, clears you."</p> + +<p>"But I would like to know," said Harry, "what +the other part of the inscription on the skulls +means?"</p> + +<p>"Do you refer to the sign of plus and the V?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"When you went into the cave, where you found +the copper box, how many chambers did you pass +before coming to the large room?"</p> + +<p>"I am not sure," he answered, "but I think four."</p> + +<p>"Yes; and the case was found in the fifth chamber. +The Plus sign indicated the cross-shaped cave, +did it not?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and there are several other things which +interest me," remarked George, gazing at John, as +he continued: "Why should the inscriptions have +been marked on the skulls?"</p> + +<p>John slowly shook his head, as he looked at Clifford. +The latter gazed vacantly into space, as +though reflecting, and finally said: "I do not +know."</p> + +<p>It will be remembered that when Walter entered +the Professor's room, where Clifford was lying, he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_231" id="p_231" href="#p_231">p. 231</a></span> +appeared to be startled at the sight of the skulls. +The copper box which held one of them was in the +adjoining room.</p> + +<p>During the foregoing conversation Walter was +mute, nor did he appear interested in the question +propounded by George.</p> + +<p>"It seems most curious to me that the skull taken +from the copper box has the inscription on the right +side, whereas the other one has them on the left +side," observed Harry.</p> + +<p>John and George saw the immediate change in +Walter's face while Harry was speaking. His agitation +was now plain to all, and the perspiration began +to appear on his forehead.</p> + +<p>John leaned forward as he said: "Do you +know?"</p> + +<p>Walter started at the vehemence of the question, +and threw back his head, as he answered: "Did +you find the copper box?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," responded John, with a look of triumph.</p> + +<p>Walter's features relaxed, and he seemed to sink +down, as he gazed about him with a final look of despair.</p> + +<p>"Then the quest is ended!" he muttered.</p> + +<p>"What do you mean? Explain!" demanded +John.</p> + +<p>"When I began the search for the treasure of the +caves, I was the owner of the original document written +by Juan Guiterez before he died in the Spanish +prison. Three attempts had been made to find the +island, which contained the secret, and that secret +was in the copper box which told of the places and +the locations of the other caves. In each case the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_232" id="p_232" href="#p_232">p. 232</a></span> +quest failed, and all perished. The peculiar significance +arises from the fact that the only directions +were given on a human skull by Guiterez himself, +who declared that two of the skulls would have the +inscriptions on the left side, while the one with the +cryptic signs on the right side would be accompanied +by the descriptions of the locations of all the Caves +on the different islands."</p> + +<p>"But why should there be three skulls?" asked +George, in great eagerness.</p> + +<p>"There were three attempts, each resulting in +death. The skull is emblematic of death."</p> + +<p>"Will you tell us why you tried to avoid Clifford, +and were startled at the sight of the skulls?" asked +John.</p> + +<p>"If, as you say, you have found the copper box, I +have no further reason to remain silent. I found +one of the skulls,—the others I could not find, one +of which I knew must be in the treasure cave. If I +had known you found the one in the cave I should +not have tried to get away, as I hoped, finally, to +find the cave. Since coming here I learned that you +had found the third island; I knew of only two, and +supposed that the two skulls were from those two, +namely, Wonder and Venture Islands."</p> + +<p>"But who placed the skulls there?" queried +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Ah! No one knows that. The Spaniard Guiterez +offers no explanation. All the so-called +<i>treasure charts</i> have been made from the accounts +which he gave, of the vast amount of gold and silver +which is hidden in these natural caches. The place +where the copper box was deposited is the grand<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_233" id="p_233" href="#p_233">p. 233</a></span> +mausoleum. Only those who know the secret could +ever reach the vault. All others would perish."</p> + +<p>"The carbonic gas!" exclaimed George.</p> + +<p>Walter turned to George, as he said this, but did +not comprehend what he meant. It was now evident +that Walter had tried to conceal his identity, and +thereby hide the secret which would enable him +alone to find the vast wealth.</p> + +<p>"So the letter which we found concealed in the +seat of our boat, was written by one of your companions?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"This clears up the mysterious things which we +have tried to fathom for over two years," said John. +"The meaning of the letters is now clear."</p> + +<p>"From the time we landed on the island," rejoined +the Professor, "we found evidences of white +people that we could not follow up, and it is now +plain that they were in search for the treasure, so +we can now comprehend what the notes meant."</p> + +<p>There is but little more to add to the chapter pertaining +to the experiences of the boys on the islands. +Perhaps, at some time in the future, their work on +the new islands will be told. What John and the +boys found in the Copper box, the historical sketches +and the locations of the treasure islands which were +pointed out on the parchments found in the compartment +below the skull, were amazing revelations of +the days of piratical adventures, when the southern +half of the world was one vast carnival of crime, in +which gold was the only booty and to obtain which +the means were always considered to be justified +by the end.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_234" id="p_234" href="#p_234">p. 234</a></span></p> + +<p>Our young friends, during their experiences in +southern waters, did their part in bringing to the uneducated +savages the blessings of civilization and +the great boon of peace. To themselves they +brought a store of hard-earned knowledge and a +memory of things well done that will last them to +the end of their days.</p> + +<p class="center"><br /><br />THE END</p> + +<hr class='major' /> + +<h2>THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS</h2> + +<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By ELBERT FISHER</p> +<p class="titleblock"><i>12mo, Cloth. Many Illustrations. 60c. per Volume</i></p> + +<p style="margin-top: 1.5em">This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who +make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They +meet with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their +adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive +matter relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries +through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports +of boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The +books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each chapter, +there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the author, and four +striking halftones.</p> + +<p><b>1. From New York to the Golden Gate</b>, takes in many of the principal +points between New York and California, and contains a highly +entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a little +useful information.</p> + +<p><b>2. From San Francisco to Japan</b>, relates the experiences of the two +boys at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to +Hawaii, Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent +at sea, and a large amount of interesting information appears throughout +the text.</p> + +<p><b>3. From Tokio to Bombay</b>. This book covers their interesting +experiences in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong +and finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a +field seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the +great Hyderabad region of South India.</p> + +<p><b>4. From India to the War Zone</b>, describes their trip toward the +Persian Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the +supposed site of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves +with a caravan through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing +the Holy Land, where they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean +port of Joppa, and their experiences thereafter within the war +zone are fully described.</p> + + +<hr class="major" /> + +<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2> + +<h3><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner +all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care +and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; +the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures, +and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two +hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and +includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the +art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published +for boys.</p> + +<h3><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental +principles in each phase of the science, and practically +applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the +knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various +phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within +the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and +is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.</p> + +<h3><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of +practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure +and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized +to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work +is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building +explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of +cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in +explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.</p> + +<p class="center"> +<br /> +<i>Price 60 cents per volume</i> +<br /> +</p> + + +<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;" +width="380" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Morton" border="1"> +<tr><td> + +<h2>The Ethel Morton Books</h2> + +<p class="titleblock" style="font-size: 115%">By MABELL S. C. SMITH</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">This series strikes a new note in the publication of books +for girls. Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing +experiences of our young friends are combined with a +fund of information relating their accomplishment of things +every girl wishes to know.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with +many of the entertaining features of handcraft, elements +of cooking, also of swimming, boating and similar pastimes. +This information is so imparted as to hold the interest +throughout. Many of the subjects treated are illustrated +by halftones and line engravings throughout the +text.</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1.5em;"><span class="smcap">LIST OF TITLES</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Chautauqua</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Holidays</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Rose House</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Enterprise</span></p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="text-indent: 1em;"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge</span></p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;"><i>Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid</i><br /></p> + +</td></tr></table> + + +<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;" + width="380" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Mountain Boys" border="1"> +<tr><td> +<h2><span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mountain</span> <span class="u">Boys</span> <span class="u">Series</span></h2> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">1. Phil Bradley's Mountain Boys</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">2. Phil Bradley at the Wheel</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">3. Phil Bradley's Shooting Box</span></p> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="margin-top: 10px; margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="smcap">4. Phil Bradley's Snow-Shoe Trail</span></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">These books describe with interesting +detail the experiences of a party of boys +among the mountain pines.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0.6em;">They teach the young reader how to +protect himself against the elements, what +to do and what to avoid, and above all to +become self-reliant and manly.</p> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>12mo. * * * Cloth.</i></p> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 1em;"><i>40 cents per volume; postpaid</i><br /><br /></p> + +</td></tr></table> + + +<h2><span class="smcap">The Hickory Ridge Boy Scouts</span></h2> + +<h3>A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS</h3> +<h4>By Capt. Alan Douglas, Scout-master</h4> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities to use +their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad +from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp +life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the boys are called +upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with +healthful excitement.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the credit +of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one after the other.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of the +final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof, form a +stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent years.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest undertaking. +Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured rivalry of the +different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing situations.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of apparent +failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and surprise their most +ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has written.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Under Canvas; or, The Hunt for the Cartaret Ghost</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys by the +exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long puzzled older heads.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Storm-bound; or, a Vacation Among the Snow Drifts</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training comes to the +rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all concerned.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge Boy +Scout Series, all illustrated:—</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Wild Animals of the United States—Tracking—Trees and Wild Flowers of the +United States—Reptiles of the United States—Fishes of the United States—Insects +of the United States and Birds of the United States.</p> + +<p class="center"><i>Cloth Binding Cover Illustrations in Four Colors 40c. per volume</i></p> + + +<table style="margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 4em;" +width="380" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="Campfire" border="1"> +<tr><td> + +<h2>The Campfire and Trail Series</h2> + +</td></tr> +<tr><td> +<p>1. <span class="smcap">In Camp on the Big Sunflower</span>.<br /> +<br /> +2. <span class="smcap">The Rivals of the Trail</span>.<br /> +<br /> +3. <span class="smcap">The Strange Cabin on Catamount Island</span>.<br /> +<br /> +4. <span class="smcap">Lost in the Great Dismal Swamp</span>.<br /> +<br /> +5. <span class="smcap">With Trapper Jim in the North Woods</span>.<br /> +<br /> +6. <span class="smcap">Caught in a Forest Fire</span>.<br /> +<br /> +7. <span class="smcap">Chums of the Campfire</span>.<br /> +<br /> +8. <span class="smcap">Afloat on the Flood</span>.<br /> +</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1.5em;">By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: .6em; line-height:1.6em;">A series of wholesome stories for boys told +in an interesting way and appealing to their +love of the open.</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Each, 12mo. Cloth. 40 cents per volume</i><br /></p> +</td></tr> +</table> + + +<h2>Christy Mathewson's Book</h2> + + +<table border="0" width="60%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="baseball"> +<tr><td> +<div class="figleft" style="width: 161px;"> +<img src="images/illus-248.png" width="161" height="250" alt=""WON IN THE NINTH"" title=""WON IN THE NINTH"" /> +</div> +<p style="margin-right:15%;margin-left:15%; line-height: 1.6em;"> +<i>A Ripping Good +Baseball Story +by One Who +Knows the Game</i></p> + +<p style="line-height: 1.6em;">This book has attained a +larger sale than any baseball +story ever published.</p> + +<p style="line-height: 1.6em;">The narrative deals with the +students of a large university +and their baseball team, the members of which +have names which enable the reader to recognize them +as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day before +their entrance into the major leagues.</p> +</td></tr> +<tr><td> +<p style="line-height: 1.6em; clear: both;">One gains a very clear idea of "inside baseball" +stripped of wearisome technicalities. The book is profusely +illustrated throughout and contains also a number +of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson +throws his deceptive curves, together with brief description +of each.</p> +</td></tr></table> + +<p class="center" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"> +<i>Cloth bound 5½ x 7⅝ Price 60c. per volume</i> +</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<h2>Mrs. Meade's Books for Girls</h2> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Primrose Edition</i></p> + + +<p class="center" style="font-size: 70%">Printed on fine quality book paper. Separate cover designs in colors.</p> + +<table width="400" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" border="0" summary="Meade"> +<tr><td> + +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Daddy's Girl.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">A Girl from America.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Sue, a Little Heroine.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">The School Queens.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Wild Kitty.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">A Sweet Girl Graduate.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">A World of Girls.</p> +<p class="titleblockl" style="line-height: 1.4em;font-size: 120%">Polly—A New-Fashioned Girl.</p> +</td></tr></table> + +<p style="text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;"><i>Each, 12mo. Cloth. 40 cents per volume</i></p> + +<p class="center" style="font-size: 130%">Mrs. Meade's girls' books never</p> +<p class="center" style="font-size: 130%; margin-bottom: 1em;">lose their popularity.</p> + +<hr class="major" /> + + +<h2><span class="u">ECONOMICAL</span> <span class="u">COOKING</span></h2> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Primrose Edition</i></p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-size: 125%;"><i>Planned for Two or More Persons</i></p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px;font-size: 80%; margin-bottom: 1em;">By</p> + +<p class="titleblock">MISS WINIFRED S. GIBBS</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-size: 70%;">Dietitian and Teacher of Cooking of the New York</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-size: 70%;margin-bottom: 1em;">Association for Improving the Condition of the Poor</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-bottom: 1em;"><i>Printed on Fine Quality Book Paper. Cover Design in Colors</i></p> + +<p class="noindent"><span class="smcap">Many</span> Cook Books have been published, from time +to time, to meet various requirements, or to elucidate +certain theories, but very few have been written to +meet the needs of the large proportion of our population +who are acutely affected by the constantly increasing +cost of food products. Notwithstanding that by its +valuable suggestions this book helps to reduce the expense +of supplying the table, the recipes are so planned that +the economies effected thereby are not offset by any +lessening in the attractiveness, variety or palatability of +the dishes.</p> +<p> +Of equal importance are the sections of this work +which deal with food values, the treatment of infants and +invalids and the proper service of various dishes.</p> +<p> +The recipes are planned for two persons, but may +readily be adapted for a larger number. The book is +replete with illustrations and tables of food compositions—the +latter taken from the latest Government statistics.</p> + +<p class="center"><i>Cloth Binding Illustrated 40c. per volume, postpaid</i></p> + + +<hr class="major" /> +<h2>CUT-OUT AND PAINT BOOKS</h2> + +<table style="clear: both" border="0" width="80%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="cut-out books"> +<col style="width:40%;" /> +<col style="width:60%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left"><div class="figleft" style="width: 163px;"> +<img src="images/illus-251.png" width="163" height="198" + alt="SCISSORS BOOK Dolls of All Nations" title="SCISSORS BOOK Dolls of All Nations" /> +</div></td> + <td align="left"><p style="line-height: 1.5em; margin-left: 0%;"> +An original line of art studies printed in full rich colors on high +grade paper. This series introduces many novel features of interest, and +as the subject matters have been selected with unusual care, the books +make a strong appeal not only to the little ones but even to those of +riper years.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr style="font-size: 120%;"> + <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Post Cards</b> </td> + <td class="pr"> <i>Painting Book</i></td> +</tr> +<tr style="font-size: 120%;"> + <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Dolls of all Nations</b> </td> + <td class="pr"> <i>Scissors Book</i></td> +</tr> +<tr style="font-size: 120%;"> + <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Our Army</b> </td> + <td class="pr"> <i>Scissors Book</i></td> +</tr> +<tr style="font-size: 120%;"> + <td align="left" style="margin-left: 10%;"><b>Children's Pets</b> </td> + <td class="pr"> <i>Puzzle Book</i></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<p class="center"><i>Size 8¼ x 10¼ inches</i></p> + +<p class="center" style="margin-bottom: 3em;"><b>Price 15c. per copy</b></p> + +<p class="center" style="word-spacing: 0.4em;"> +THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY<br /> +147 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK +</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF THE ISLAND***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 21810-h.txt or 21810-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/8/1/21810</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/21810-h/images/cover-spine.jpg b/21810-h/images/cover-spine.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..41b35cb --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/cover-spine.jpg diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-003.png b/21810-h/images/illus-003.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..81654f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-003.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-037-fig1.png b/21810-h/images/illus-037-fig1.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a672d21 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-037-fig1.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-043-fig2.png b/21810-h/images/illus-043-fig2.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1895976 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-043-fig2.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-046-fig3.png b/21810-h/images/illus-046-fig3.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e346584 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-046-fig3.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-055-fig4.png b/21810-h/images/illus-055-fig4.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d7c471 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-055-fig4.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-060.png b/21810-h/images/illus-060.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a3bb235 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-060.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-078-fig5.png b/21810-h/images/illus-078-fig5.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d346b4d --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-078-fig5.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-079-fig6.png b/21810-h/images/illus-079-fig6.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8f5e9f --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-079-fig6.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-093-fig7.png b/21810-h/images/illus-093-fig7.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6c9350 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-093-fig7.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-097-fig8.png b/21810-h/images/illus-097-fig8.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..15649d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-097-fig8.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-122-fig9.png b/21810-h/images/illus-122-fig9.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9504c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-122-fig9.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-132-fig10.png b/21810-h/images/illus-132-fig10.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7927a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-132-fig10.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-142.gif b/21810-h/images/illus-142.gif Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..21ded4a --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-142.gif diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-152-fig11.png b/21810-h/images/illus-152-fig11.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e38223b --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-152-fig11.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-159-fig12.png b/21810-h/images/illus-159-fig12.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5bea24c --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-159-fig12.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-160.png b/21810-h/images/illus-160.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3bad99 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-160.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-166-fig13.png b/21810-h/images/illus-166-fig13.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..21fba8e --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-166-fig13.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-167-fig14.png b/21810-h/images/illus-167-fig14.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..637defd --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-167-fig14.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-248.png b/21810-h/images/illus-248.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4fae9df --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-248.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-251.png b/21810-h/images/illus-251.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..72793a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-251.png diff --git a/21810-h/images/illus-nybc.png b/21810-h/images/illus-nybc.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a9077e --- /dev/null +++ b/21810-h/images/illus-nybc.png |
